Mercury 115-175 Optimax PDF
Mercury 115-175 Optimax PDF
Mercury 115-175 Optimax PDF
115/135/150/175
OptiMax
Direct Fuel Injection
Starting Model Year 2000
Starting S/N OG960500
DANGER
DANGER - Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal in-
jury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product
or property damage.
Page Numbering
Two number groups appear at the bottom of each page. The example below is self-explana-
tory.
EXAMPLE:
Page Number
Page ii 90-859494R1 JUNE 2000
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1A - Specifications A
Table of Contents
Master Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1
Master Specifications
Master Specifications
Model 135/150 DFI
FUEL Fuel Gasoline w/Oil Injection
SYSTEM Recommended Gasoline Unleaded 87 Octane Minimum
Recommended Oil Quicksilver TC-W3 Premium Plus 2
Cycle Outboard Oil
Gasoline/Oil Ratio
– @ Idle 300 – 400:1
– @ WOT 60:1
Fuel Pressure
Crankcase Pump
– @ Idle 2 psi (13.8 kPa)
– @ WOT 8 psi (55.2 kPa)
STARTING Electric Start – All Models
SYSTEM Starter Draw (Under Load) 165 Amperes
Starter Draw (No Load) 30 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length 0.25 in. (65.4 mm)
Battery Rating 1000 (Minimum) Marine Cranking Amps
(MCA)
750 (Minimum) Cold Cranking Amps
(CCA)
IGNITION Type Digital Inductive
SYSTEM Spark Plug Type NGK PZFR5F-11
NGK ZFR5F-11 or
Champion RC12MC4
Spark Plug Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
Maximum Timing Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM
Idle Timing Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM
Throttle Position Sensor 1 (Inner
TPS)
@ Idle 3.70 – 4.90 VDC
@ W.O.T 0.30 – 1.80 VDC
Throttle Position Sensor 2 (Outer
TPS)
@ Idle 0.10 – 1.50 VDC
@ W.O.T 3.20 – 4.90 VDC
Crank Position Sensor
Air Gap 0.025 in. – 0.040 in.
(0.635 mm – 1.01 mm)
CHARGING Alternator Output (Regulated) 32 - 38 Amperes @ 2000 RPM
SYSTEM @ Battery*
52 - 60 Amperes @ 2000 RPM
@ Alternator
Brush Length Std Exposed Length:
0.413 in. (10.5 mm)
Min. Exposed Length:
0.059 in. (1.5 mm)
Voltage Output 13.5 to 15.1 Volts
Regulator Current Draw 0.15 mA (Ign. Switch Off)
30.0 mA (Ign. Switch On)
*Amperage listed is when battery is in a discharged state. If battery is fully charged, amperage readings will
be less.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1B - Maintenance B
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6
Gear Case Lubricant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Fuel Line Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2 Water Separating Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2 Corrosion Control Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
Inspection and Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Spark Plug Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
Before Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Battery Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8
After Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, Compressor Air intake Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9
Whichever occurs first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9
Flushing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9
Flushing Cooling System – Using Cowl Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9
Flush Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Checking Power Trim Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-11
Flushing Cooling System – Using Flushing Gear Case Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-12
Attachment 44357A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Storage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13
Specifications
Gear Case Lubricant Capacity
Gear Case Ratio Capacity
1.87:1 22.5 fl. oz. (665ml)
2.00:1 22.5 fl. oz. (665ml)
2.30:1 22.5 fl. oz. (665ml)
Special Tools
1. Grease Gun 91-37299A1
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant
1. Gear Lubricant - Premium Blend 92-19007A24
Flushing Engine
Flushing Cooling System – Using Cowl Flush Plug
Flush the internal water passages of the outboard with fresh water after each use in salt,
polluted or muddy water. This will help prevent a buildup of deposits from clogging the
internal water passages.
NOTE: Engine can be stopped or running at idle speed when flushing the cooling system.
Do not flush engine using a water system that exceeds 45 psi.
1. Remove the plug from fitting in the bottom cowl.
2. Attach a water hose to the fitting. Turn water on and flush for 3 to 5 minutes.
Flushing Cooling System – Using Flushing Attachment 44357A2
WARNING
When flushing, verify that area in vicinity of propeller is clear and that no person
is standing nearby – to avoid possible injury. It is recommended to remove pro-
peller as a precautionary measure.
1. Install Quicksilver Flushing Attachment 44357A2 (or equivalent tool) on the gear
housing from the FRONT side, positioning the rubber cups over the water intake
openings.
2. Connect hose [1/2 in. (12.7mm) I.D. or larger] between flushing attachment and water
tap.
IMPORTANT: To prevent water pump damage, do not start or run engine unless
cooling water is flowing.
3. With the outboard in the normal operating position (vertical), partially open water tap
(IT IS NOT NECESSARY to use full water pressure) and adjust water flow so that
there is a significant water loss around the rubber cups.
4. Start engine and idle in NEUTRAL. Increase engine speed, not to exceed 2500 RPM.
5. Flush or service engine as required. Verify adequate cooling water is provided.
a. Water must be discharged thru “tell tale.”
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine overheating. If water flow is insufficient, stop engine
and determine cause before continuing.
b. Flush until discharge water is clear. In salt-water areas, run outboard 3 to 5 min-
utes.
c. Stop engine before turning off water.
6. Stop engine, turn water off and remove flushing attachment from gear housing.
IMPORTANT: While and after flushing, keep outboard in upright position until all
water has drained from drive shaft housing to prevent water from entering the pow-
erhead via drive shaft housing and exhaust ports.
Fuel System
WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from gasoline fire or explosion. Carefully follow all
fuel system service instructions. Always stop the engine and DO NOT smoke or
allow open flames or sparks in the area while servicing any part of the fuel sys-
tem.
Before servicing any part of the fuel system, stop engine and disconnect the battery. Drain
the fuel system completely. Use an approved container to collect and store fuel. Wipe up
any spillage immediately. Material used to contain spillage must be disposed of in an ap-
proved receptacle. Any fuel system service must be performed in a well ventilated area.
Inspect any completed service work for sign of fuel leakage.
Fuel Line Inspection
Visually inspect the fuel line and primer bulb for cracks, swelling, leaks, hardness, or other
signs of deterioration or damage. If any of these conditions is found, the fuel line or primer
bulb must be replaced.
Water Separating Fuel Filter
NOTE: The warning system will turn on when water in the fuel filter reaches the full level.
1. This filter removes moisture and also debris from the fuel. If the filter becomes filled
with water, the water can be removed. If the filter becomes plugged with debris, the
filter must be replaced with a new filter.
b
Each anode requires periodic inspection especially in salt water which will accelerate the
erosion. To maintain this corrosion protection, always replace the anode before it is com-
pletely eroded. Never paint or apply a protective coating on the anode as this will reduce
effectiveness of the anode.
2. Remove the spark plugs to inspect and clean. Replace spark plug if electrode is worn
or the insulator is rough, cracked, broken, blistered or fouled.
3. Set the spark plug gap. See Specification Chart in General Information Section.
4. Before reinstalling spark plugs, clean away dirt on the spark plug seats. Install plugs
finger tight, and tighten 1/4 turn or torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m).
Battery Inspection
The battery should be inspected at periodic intervals to ensure proper engine starting
capability.
IMPORTANT: Read the safety and maintenance instructions which accompany
your battery.
1. Turn off the engine before servicing the battery.
2. Add water as necessary to keep the battery full.
3. Make sure the battery is secure against movement.
4. Battery cable terminals should be clean, tight, and correctly installed. Positive to posi-
tive and negative to negative.
5. Make sure the battery is equipped with a nonconductive shield to prevent accidental
shorting of battery terminals.
Fuse Replacement
IMPORTANT: Always carry spare SFE 20 AMP fuses.
The electrical wiring circuits on the outboard are protected from overload by fuses in the
wiring. If a fuse is blown, try to locate and correct the cause of the overload. If the cause
is not found, the fuse may blow again.
1. Open the fuse holder and look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If band is
broken, replace the fuse. Replace fuse with a new fuse with the same rating.
2. The fuses and circuits are identified as follows:
a. Electric Fuel Pump Circuit – SFE 20 AMP Fuse.
b. Fuel/Air Injector Circuits – SFE 20 AMP Fuse.
c. Starting Circuit – SFE 20 AMP Fuse.
d. Ignition Coil/Oil Pump Circuit – SFE 20 AMP Fuse.
a
b
c
d
Installation
Install filter (b) into the cover. Secure filter into cover with retainer (a).
Lubrication Points
Lubricate Point 1 with Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101.
1. Trim Rod Ball Ends – Turn the ball ends to work the lubricant into the ball sockets.
Lubricate Point 2 with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon.
2. Propeller Shaft – Refer to Propeller Replacement for removal and installation of the
propeller. Coat the entire propeller shaft with lubricant to prevent the propeller hub
from corroding and seizing to the shaft.
Lubricate Points 3 thru 6 with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon or Special
Lubricate 101.
3. Swivel Bracket – Lubricate through fitting.
4. Tilt Support Lever – Lubricate through fitting.
4
5. Tilt Tube – Lubricate through fitting.
6. Steering Cable Grease Fitting (If Equipped) – Rotate steering wheel to fully retract the
steering cable end (a) into the outboard tilt tube. Lubricate through fitting (b).
WARNING
The end of the steering cable must be fully retracted into the outboard tilt tube
before adding lubricant. Adding lubricant to steering cable when fully extended
could cause steering cable to become hydraulically locked. An hydraulically
locked steering cable will cause loss of steering control, possibly resulting in se-
rious injury or death.
Lubricate Points 7 With Light Weight Oil.
7. Steering Link Rod Pivot Points – Lubricate pivot points.
6-b 6-a
9. Remove fill cap and check fluid level. The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole. Add Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid. If not available, use auto-
motive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
2 1
a
c
d
1-5 b
STORAGE PREPARATION
The major consideration in preparing your outboard for storage is to protect it from rust,
corrosion, and damage caused by freezing of trapped water.
The following storage procedures should be followed to prepare your outboard for out of
season storage or prolonged storage (two months or longer).
CAUTION
Never start or run your outboard (even momentarily) without water circulating
through all the cooling water intake holes in the gear case to prevent damage to
the water pump (running dry) or overheating of the engine.
FUEL SYSTEM
IMPORTANT: Gasoline containing alcohol (ethanol or methanol) can cause a for-
mation of acid during storage and can damage the fuel system. If the gasoline be-
ing used contains alcohol, it is advisable to drain as much of the remaining gaso-
line as possible from the fuel tank, remote fuel line, and engine fuel system.
Fill the fuel system (tank, hoses, fuel pumps, and fuel injection systems) with treated (sta-
bilized) fuel to help prevent formation of varnish and gum. Proceed with following instruc-
tions.
1. Portable Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer (fol-
low instructions on container) into fuel tank. Tip fuel tank back and forth to mix stabiliz-
er with the fuel.
2. Permanently Installed Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline
Stabilizer (follow instructions on container) into a separate container and mix with ap-
proximately one quart (one liter) of gasoline. Pour this mixture into fuel tank.
3. Place the outboard in water or connect flushing attachment for circulating cooling
water. Run the engine at 2000 rpm for 25 minutes to allow treated fuel to fill the fuel
system.
PROTECTING INTERNAL ENGINE COMPONENTS
NOTE: Make sure the fuel system has been prepared for storage.
1. Remove the spark plugs and add approximately one ounce (30ml) of engine oil into
each spark plug hole. Rotate the flywheel manually several times to distribute the oil
in the cylinders. Reinstall spark plugs.
2. Remove the water separating fuel filter and empty contents into a suitable container.
Refer to Maintenance Section for removal and installation of filter. Replace fuel filter
annually, or every 100 Hours of operation, or if large amount of fuel contamination is
present.
PROTECTING EXTERNAL OUTBOARD COMPONENTS
1. Lubricate all outboard components listed in the Inspection and Maintenance
Schedule.
2. Touch up any paint nicks. See your dealer for touch-up paint.
3. Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on external metal surfaces (except corrosion con-
trol anodes).
GEAR CASE
Drain and refill the gear case lubricant (refer to maintenance procedure).
POSITIONING OUTBOARD FOR STORAGE
Store outboard in an upright (vertical) position to allow water to drain out of outboard.
CAUTION
If outboard is stored tilted up in freezing temperature, trapped cooling water or
rain water that may have entered the propeller exhaust outlet in the gear case
could freeze and cause damage to the outboard.
BATTERY STORAGE
1. Follow the battery manufacturers instructions for storage and recharging.
2. Remove the battery from the boat and check water level. Recharge if necessary.
3. Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
4. Periodically check the water level and recharge the battery during storage.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1C - General Information C
Table of Contents
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-1 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Front View . . . . . . 1C-9
Conditions Affecting Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Starboard View 1C-10
Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Port View . . . . . . 1C-11
Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Top View . . . . . . 1C-12
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-4 Model 135/150 DFI Powerhead Aft View . . . . . . 1C-13
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Painting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-14
Engine Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear
Following Complete Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7 Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-14
Salt Water Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7 Decal Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15
Submerged While Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7 Decal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15
Instructions for “Wet” Application . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15
e
d
XX
a - Serial Number
b - Model Year
c - Model Description
d - Year Manufactured
e - Certified Europe Insignia
Weather conditions exert a profound effect on power output of internal combustion en-
gines. Established horsepower ratings refer to the power that the engine will produce at
its rated RPM under a specific combination of weather conditions.
Corporations internationally have settled on adoption of I.S.O. (International Standards
Organization) engine test standards, as set forth in I.S.O. 3046 standardizing the compu-
tation of horsepower from data obtained on the dynamometer, correcting all values to the
power that the engine will produce at sea level, at 30% relative humidity at 77° F (25°C)
temperature and a barometric pressure of 29.61 inches of mercury.
Summer conditions of high temperature, low barometric pressure and high humidity all
combine to reduce engine power. This is reflected in decreased boat speeds – as much
as 2 or 3 mph. Nothing will regain this speed for the boater but the coming of cool, dry
weather.
In pointing out the consequences of weather effects, an engine – running on a hot, humid
summer day – may lose as much as 14% of the horsepower it would produce on a dry,
brisk spring or fall day. The horsepower that any internal combustion engine produces
depends upon the density of the air that it consumes and this density is dependent upon
the temperature of the air, its barometric pressure and water vapor (or humidity) content.
Accompanying this weather-inspired loss of power is a second but more subtle loss. At
rigging time in early spring, the engine was equipped with a propeller that allowed the
engine to run within its recommended RPM range at full throttle. With the coming of the
summer weather and the consequent drop in available horsepower, this propeller will, in
effect, become too large. Consequently, the engine operates at less than its recom-
mended RPM.
Due to the horsepower/RPM characteristics of an engine, this will result in further loss of
horsepower at the propeller with another decrease in boat speed. This secondary loss
can be regained by switching to a smaller pitch propeller that allows the engine to run
again at recommended RPM.
To obtain optimum engine performance under changing weather conditions, the engine
MUST be propped to allow it to operate at or near the top end of the recommended maxi-
mum RPM range at wide-open-throttle with a normal boat load.
This will allow the engine to develop full power while operating in an RPM range that dis-
courages damaging detonation.
Boat
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
1. Proper positioning of the weight inside the boat (persons and gear) has a significant
effect on the boat’s performance, for example:
a. Shifting weight to the rear (stern)
(1.) Generally increases top speed.
(2.) If in excess, can cause the boat to porpoise.
(3.) Can make the bow bounce excessively in choppy water.
(4.) Will increase the danger of the following wave splashing into the boat when
coming off plane.
b. Shifting weight to the front (bow)
(1.) Improves ease of planing off.
(2.) Generally improves rough water ride.
(3.) If excessive, can make the boat veer back-and-forth (bow steer).
BOTTOM
1. Boat Bottom: For maximum speed, a boat bottom should be nearly a flat plane where
it contacts the water and particularly straight and smooth in fore-and-aft direction.
a. Hook: Exists when bottom is concave in fore-and -aft direction when viewed from
the side. When boat is planing, “hook” causes more lift on bottom near transom
and allows bow to drop, thus greatly increasing wetted surface and reducing boat
speed. “Hook” frequently is caused by supporting boat too far ahead of transom
while hauling on a trailer or during storage.
b. Rocker: The reverse of hook and much less common. “Rocker” exists if bottom
is convex in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the side, and boat has strong
tendency to porpoise.
c. Surface Roughness: Moss, barnacles, etc., on boat or corrosion of motor’s gear
housing increase skin friction and cause speed loss. Clean surfaces when neces-
sary.
d. Gear Housing: If unit is left in the water, marine vegetation may accumulate over
a period of time. This growth MUST be removed from unit before operation, as it
may clog the water inlet holes in the gear housing and cause the engine to over-
heat.
Trim
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “OUT” (“UP”)
WARNING
Excessive trim “out” also may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To
correct instability at high speed, reduce the power GRADUALLY and trim the out-
board “in” slightly before resuming high speed operation. (Rapid reduction in
power will cause a sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional
momentary boat instability.)
1. Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
2. Transfers steering torque harder to left on single outboard installations below 23 in.
(584mm) transom height.
3. Increases clearance over submerged objects.
4. In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
5. If trimmed out beyond the water pickup, reduced water supply can cause overheating
resulting in engine damage.
WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “in” may cause undesirable and/or unsafe
steering conditions. Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after
any adjustment is made to the angle (trim adjustment bolt relocation.)
1. Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
2. Usually improves ride in choppy water.
3. In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right (bow steer).
4. Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to the left) on single outboard installa-
tions.
5. Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving trim adjustment bolt one hole closer
to transom).
WATER ABSORPTION
It is imperative that all through hull fasteners be coated with a quality marine sealer at time
of installation. Water intrusion into the transom core and/or inner hull will result in addition-
al boat weight (reduced boat performance), hull decay and eventual structural failure.
CAVITATION
Cavitation is caused by water vapor bubbles forming either from a sharp edge or angle
on the gear case or from an irregularity in the propeller blade itself. These vapor bubbles
flow back and collapse when striking the surface of the propeller blade resulting in the ero-
sion of the propeller blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual blade failure (break-
age) will occur.
VENTILATION
Ventilation occurs when air is drawn from the water’s surface (excessive trim out angle)
or from the engine exhaust flow (wrong propeller/propeller hardware installed or gear
case labyrinth seal worn) into the propeller blades. These air bubbles strike the propeller
blade surface and cause erosion of the blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual
blade failure (breakage) will occur.
Engine
DETONATION
Detonation in a 2-cycle engine resembles the “pinging” heard in an automobile engine.
It can be otherwise described as a tin-like “rattling” or “plinking” sound.
Detonation is an explosion of an unburned portion of the fuel/air charge after the spark
plug has fired. Detonation creates severe shock waves in the engine, and these shock
waves often find or create a weakness: The dome of a piston, cylinder head/gasket, piston
rings or piston ring lands, piston pin and roller bearings.
A few of the most common causes of detonation in a marine 2-cycle application are as
follows:
• Over-advanced ignition timing.
• Use of low octane gasoline.
• Propeller pitch too high (engine RPM below recommended maximum range).
• Lean fuel mixture at or near wide-open-throttle.
• Spark plugs (heat range too hot – incorrect reach – cross-firing).
• Inadequate engine cooling (deteriorated cooling system).
Detonation usually can be prevented if:
1. The engine is correctly set up.
2. Diligent maintenance is applied to combat the detonation causes.
51115
Engine Compression
Engine compression should be checked with engine block warm, throttle shutter wide
open, all spark plugs removed and using a fully charged battery. Normal compression for
all cylinders should be 110 to 130 psi (758.5 to 896.4 kPa). Cylinders should not vary more
than 15 psi (103.4 kPa) between one another. A variance of more than 15 psi would indi-
cate the need for a power head inspection/disassembly.
c. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the re-
mote control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automati-
cally start the priming process.
N
F
NOTE: Audible click from the oil pump will tell you the pump is priming. It may take a few
minutes for the pump to complete the priming process.
11. Attempt to start engine, using a fresh fuel source.If engine starts, it should be run for
at least one hour to eliminate any water in engine.
12. If engine fails to start, determine cause (fuel, electrical or mechanical).
12
11
10 13
9 7
6
2
8
4 5
57314
18
17
13
24
16
15 5
20
14
23
22 7
19
21
8
10 9
57317
1 - Fuel Pressure Test Valve 14 - Starter Solenoid
2 - Air Compressor Oil Return Line 15 - Oil Pump Fuse
3 - Crank Position Sensor 16 - Harness Fuse (20 Ampere)
4 - Throttle Plate/Air Plenum Assembly 17 - ECM Fuse (20 Ampere)
5 - Digital Diagnostic Terminal Connector 18 - Electric Fuel Pump Fuse (20 Ampere)
6 - Oil Hose from Oil Reservoir to Oil Pump 19 - Air Hose
7 - Oil Pump 20 - Starboard Fuel Rail
8 - Main Power Relay(1998 Model)* 21 - Fuel Hose
9 - Trim DOWN Relay 22 - #5 Fuel Injector
10 - Trim UP Relay (1998 Model)* 23 - #3 Fuel Injector
11 - Temperature Sensor 24 - #1 Fuel Injector
12 - Electronic Control Module 25 - Air Hose from Air Compressor
13 - Starter Motor
NOTE: *The location for 1999 Model Main Power Relay and Trim UP Relay are reversed.
3 8
31 18
23
19 9
24
10
31
15 11
20
25
1
29 26 13
21
17
32
30 12
27
28
22
14
16
57312
1 - High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump 17 - Excess Fuel Return to Fuel Cooler
2 - Fuel Out (90 psi) 18 - Air Pressure Test Port
3 - Crank Position Sensor 19 - 40 psi Check Valve
4 - Fuel Return from Fuel Cooler 20 - Fuel Cooler
5 - Water Out (tell-tale) from Air Compressor 21 - Oil Reservoir
6 - Air Restrictor/Air Inlet to Air Compressor 22 - Neutral Shift Interrupt Switch
7 - Air Compressor 23 - 60 Ampere Alternator
8 - Air Pressure Out from Air Compressor 24 - Throttle Position Sensor (2 each)
9 - Temperature Sensor (Air Compressor) 25 - Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump
10 - #2 Fuel Injector 26 - Fuel/Water Separator
11 - #4 Fuel Injector 27 - Fuel/Water Sensor
12 - #6 Fuel Injector 28 - Low Pressure Fuel Pump Inlet Hose
13 - Excess Air to Adaptor Plate 29 - Vapor Separator
14 - Water Inlet to Fuel Cooler from Adaptor Plate 30 - Vapor Separator Drain Plug
15 - Port Fuel Rail 31 - Vent Canister
16 - Water Out to Poppet Valve 32 - Idle Stop Screw
20
1
18 19
7 3
17 15
5
21
16
6
14
22 4
13
12 11 23
10
57313
18
9
28
8
19
27
17 11
26
20
21
25 10
24 16
12
23 22
15
14 13 57315
Painting Procedures
Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear Housings
WARNING
Avoid serious injury from flying debris. Avoid serious injury from airborne par-
ticles. Use eye and breathing protection with proper ventilation.
PROPELLERS
1. Sand the entire area to be painted with 3M 120 Regalite Polycut or coarse Scotch-
Brite, disc or belts.
2. Feather edges of all broken paint edges. Try not to sand through the primer.
3. Clean the surface to be painted using PPG Industries DX330 Wax and Grease Re-
mover or equivalent (Xylene or M.E.K.).
4. If bare metal has been exposed, use Quicksilver’s Light Gray Primer.
5. Allow a minimum of 1 hour dry time and no more than 1 week before applying the finish
coat.
6. Apply the finish coat using Quicksilver’s EDP Propeller Black.
GEAR HOUSINGS
The following procedures should be used in refinishing gear housings. This procedure will
provide the most durable paint system available in the field. The materials recommended
are of high quality and approximate marine requirements. The following procedure will
provide a repaint job that compares with a properly applied factory paint finish. It is recom-
mended that the listed materials be purchased from a local Ditzler Automotive Finish Sup-
ply Outlet. The minimum package quantity of each material shown following is sufficient
to refinish several gear housings.
Procedure:
1. Wash gear housing with a muriatic acid base cleaner to remove any type of marine
growth, and rinse with water, if necessary.
2. Wash gear housing with soap and water, then rinse.
3. Sand blistered area with 3M 180 grit sandpaper or P180 Gold Film Disc to remove
paint blisters only. Feather edge all broken paint edges.
4. Clean gear housing thoroughly with (DX-330) wax and grease remover.
5. Spot repair surfaces where bare metal is exposed with (DX-503) alodine treatment.
IMPORTANT: Do not use any type of aerosol spray paints as the paint will not prop-
erly adhere to the surface nor will the coating be sufficiently thick to resist future
paint blistering.
6. Mix epoxy chromate primer (DP-40) with equal part catalyst (DP-401) per manufac-
turers instructions, allowing proper induction period for permeation of the epoxy prim-
er and catalyst.
7. Allow a minimum of one hour drying time and no more than one week before top coat-
ing assemblies.
8. Use Ditzler Urethane DU9000 for Mercury Black, DU34334 for Mariner Grey, and
DU35466 for Force Charcoal, and DU33414M for Sea Ray White. Catalyze all four
colors with Ditzler DU5 catalyst mixed 1:1 ratio. Reduce with solvents per Ditzler label.
CAUTION
Be sure to comply with instructions on the label for ventilation and respirators.
Using a spray gun, apply one half to one mil even film thickness. Let dry, flash off
for five minutes and apply another even coat of one half to one mil film thickness.
This urethane paint will dry to the touch in a matter of hours, but will remain sensi-
tive to scratches and abrasions for a few days.
9. The type of spray gun used will determine the proper reduction ratio of the paint.
IMPORTANT: Do not paint sacrificial zinc trim tab or zinc anode.
10. Cut out a cardboard “plug” for trim tab pocket to keep paint off of mating surface to
maintain good continuity circuitry between trim tab and gear housing.
Decal Application
Decal Removal
1. Mark decal location before removal to assure proper alignment of new decal.
2. Carefully soften decal and decal adhesive with a heat gun or heat blower while re-
moving old decal.
3. Clean decal contact area with a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water.
4. Thoroughly dry decal contact area and check for a completely cleaned surface.
Instructions for “Wet” Application
NOTE: The following decal installation instructions are provided for a “Wet” installation.
All decals should be applied wet.
TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Plastic Squeegee*
2. Stick Pin
3. Dish Washing Liquid/Detergent without ammonia** “Joy” and “Drift” are known to
be compatible for this process.
** Automotive Body Filler Squeegee
** Do not use a soap that contains petroleum based solvents.
SERVICE TIP: Placement of decals using the “Wet” application will allow time to
position decal. Read entire installation instructions on this technique before pro-
ceeding.
TEMPERATURE
IMPORTANT: Installation of vinyl decals should not be attempted while in direct
sunlight. Air and surface temperature should be between 60°F (15°C) and 100°F
(38°C) for best application.
SURFACE PREPARATION
IMPORTANT: Do not use a soap or any petroleum based solvents to clean applica-
tion surface.
Clean entire application surface with mild dish washing liquid and water. Rinse surface
thoroughly with clean water.
DECAL APPLICATION
1. Mix 1/2 ounce (16 ml) of dish washing liquid in one gallon (4 l) of cool water to use as
wetting solution.
NOTE: Leave protective masking, if present, on the face of decal until final steps of decal
installation. This will ensure that the vinyl decal keeps it’s shape during installation.
2. Place the decal face down on a clean work surface and remove the paper backing
from “adhesive side” of decal.
3. Using a spray bottle, flood the entire “adhesive side” of the decal with the pre-mixed
wetting solution.
4. Flood area where the decal will be positioned with wetting solution.
5. Position pre-wetted decal on wetted surface and slide into position.
6. Starting at the center of the decal, “lightly” squeegee out the air bubbles and wetting
solution with overlapping strokes to the outer edge of the decal. Continue going over
the decal surface until all wrinkles are gone and adhesive bonds to the cowl surface.
7. Wipe decal surface with soft paper towel or cloth.
8. Wait 10 - 15 minutes.
9. Starting at one corner, “carefully and slowly” pull the masking off the decal surface at
a 180° angle.
NOTE: To remove any remaining bubbles, pierce the decal at one end of the bubble with
stick pin and press out the entrapped air or wetting solution with your thumb (moving to-
ward the puncture).
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1D - Outboard Motor Installation D
Table of Contents
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Dual Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8
Lifting Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Shift Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-9
Installing Outboard to Boat Transom . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Counter Rotation Outboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-9
Determining Recommended Outboard Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-10
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Throttle Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-12
Installing Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-12
Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Front Clamp Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-13
Securing Outboard To Boat Transom . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 Filling Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14
Steering Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 Oil Injection Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14
Steering Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-5 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14
Electrical, Hoses and Control Cables . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Priming the Oil Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-15
Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Purging Air From the Engine Oil Tank . . . . . . 1D-16
Remote Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-16
Warning Gauge Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-7 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17
Battery Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Models Without Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17
Single Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Models With Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17
Installation Specifications
a
aa
b
Lifting Outboard
Electric Start Models – Remove plastic cap from flywheel hub. Thread lifting ring into
flywheel a minimum of 5 turns. Replace plastic cap after installation.
25 in. b
(635mm)
24 in.
(609mm)
e 23 in.
Outboard
Mounting
(584mm) c
Height (See
NOTE Below) 22 in. b
(560mm)
e
21 in.
(533mm) a
20 in. d
(508mm)
19 in.
(482mm)
Installing Outboard
Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes
1. Attach (tape) engine mounting template (located with the installation manual) to boat
transom.
a - Centerline of Transom
b - Transom Drilling Fixture (91-98234A2)
b
c
b
c a
Steering Cable
STARBOARD SIDE ROUTED CABLE
1. Lubricate O-ring seal and entire cable end.
95
a
c
b
a - Special Bolt (10-90041) Torque to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Torque to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m)
c - Flat Washer (2)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Tighten Locknut Until it Seats, Then Back
Nut Off 1/4 Turn
IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine
must be fastened using special washer head bolt (“a” – Part Number 10-14000) and
self locking nuts (“b” & “c” – Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts must never
be replaced with common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate
off freeing the link rod to disengage.
WARNING
Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden,
sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown
overboard exposing them to serious injury or death.
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
GRN/WHT GRN/WHT a
TAN
BRN/WHT
1 6
2 3 45
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
d
a - TAN/BLACK
b - TAN/WHITE
c - PINK/LT. BLUE to PINK/LT. BLUE
d - ORANGE
e - Connect PURPLE to 12 Volt Source or Adjacent Gauge
f - Sta-Straps – Fasten Wiring to Prevent Catching on Cowl
Battery Cables
Single Outboard
(+)
b
c
(–)
Dual Outboard
Connect a common ground cable (wire size same as engine battery cables) between
NEGATIVE (–) terminals on starting batteries.
(–)
(–)
Shift Cable
Install cables into the remote control following the instructions provided with the remote
control.
NOTE: Install the shift cable to the engine first. The shift cable is the first cable to move
when the remote control handle is moved out of neutral.
COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS
Counter rotating (left hand) gear cases can be identified by a “L” stamped into the end of
the propeller shaft.
The Quicksilver Dual Engine Console Mount Control, P/N 88688A22 or 88688A52, is re-
quired to shift the counter rotation outboard. The installation instructions shipped with the
control explain the procedure required to connect this control to a counter rotation out-
board.
IMPORTANT: If the counter rotation outboard is rigged similar to a standard rota-
tion outboard OR if a standard rotation outboard is rigged similar to a counter rota-
tion outboard, the reverse gear and bearing in the gear case must function as for-
ward gear. THE REVERSE GEAR/BEARING ARE NOT DESIGNED TO CARRY THE
SUSTAINED LOADS THAT ARE GENERATED WHEN RUNNING UNDER CONSTANT
HIGH RPM AND THRUST CONDITIONS.
OUTBOARD SHIFTING DIRECTION
On counter rotation outboards, the shift linkage moves in the opposite direction compared
to a standard rotation outboard.
STANDARD ROTATION GEAR OUTBOARDS
Forward Gear Reverse Gear
Installation
IMPORTANT: Step 1 must be followed for proper adjustment of the shift cable.
1. Locate the center point of the slack or lost motion that exists in the shift cable as fol-
lows:
a. Move the remote control handle from neutral into forward and advance the handle
to full speed position. Slowly return the handle back to the neutral. Place a mark
(a) on the cable against the cable end guide.
b. Move the remote control handle from neutral into reverse and advance the handle
to full speed position. Slowly return the handle back to the neutral. Place a mark
(b) on the cable against the cable end guide.
c. Make a center mark (c), midway between marks (“a” and “b”). Align the cable end
guide against this center mark when installing cable to the engine.
STANDARD ROTATION OUTBOARDS
a
3. Slide the shift cable retainer forward until resistance is felt, then slide cable anchor
toward rear until resistance is felt. Center the anchor pin between resistance points.
a
4. Align the shift cable end guide with the center mark as instructed in Step 1.
5. Place shift cable on anchor pin. Adjust cable barrel so it slips freely into the barrel
holder.
6. Secure shift cable with shift cable retainer.
b
a
a - Cable Barrel
b - Shift Cable Retainer
d. Return remote control handle to neutral. The propeller should turn freely without
drag. If not, adjust barrel closer to cable end guide. Repeat steps a thru d.
Throttle Cable
INSTALLATION
1. Position remote control into neutral.
N
a
a - Latch
3. Adjust the cable barrel so that the installed throttle cable will hold the idle stop screw
against the stop.
a b
b. Return remote control to neutral. Place a thin piece of paper between idle adjust-
ment screw and idle stop. Adjustment is correct when the paper can be removed
without tearing, but has some drag on it. Readjust cable barrel if necessary.
IMPORTANT: The idle stop screw must be touching the stop.
a b
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
b
c
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÉÉÉ ÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
a
ÇÇÇÉÉÉ ÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
d
ÇÇÇÉÉÉ
g
e
a - Battery Cables
b - Remote Wiring Harness
c - Warning Gauge Wiring Harness
d - Control Cables
e - Oil Hose with Blue Stripe
f - Fuel Hose
g - Oil Hose
a - Screws
a - Fill Cap
2. Remove cap and fill engine oil tank with oil. Reinstall the fill cap.
b
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the fuel pumps, fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Other-
wise the fuel pumps will run without fuel during the priming process.
Prime the oil injection pump as follows:
1. Fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Connect fuel hose and squeeze primer bulb until
it fells firm.
2. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position.
3. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the remote
control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automatically start
the priming process.
N
F
NOTE: It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process.
Purging Air From the Engine Oil Tank
1. Loosen the fill cap on the engine oil tank.
2. Start the engine. Run the engine until the all the air has been vented out of the tank
and oil starts to flow out of the tank. Re-tighten fill cap.
a
a - Fill Cap
WARNING
Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an intermediate trim
position as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spin-
out. Do not attempt to turn boat when engine is trimmed extremely under or in.
ELECTRICAL
Section 2A – Ignition
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1 Disconnecting Harness Connectors from
2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2 Ignition Coils and/or Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 A
Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Troubleshooting Without Digital Diagnostic
Ignition Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10
Electronic Control Module (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Troubleshooting With the Digital Diagnostic
Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-11
Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-12
Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 DDT Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 DFI Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-15
Charging System Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Ignition Components Removal and Installation . . 2A-18
Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8 Flywheel Cover Removal and Installation . . . . 2A-18
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor . . . 2A-9 Electronic Control Module (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-19
Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Ignition Module (Coil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-20
Direct Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-21
Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9 Throttle Position Sensors (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-21
Specifications
Ignition Coil Ohm Test
Temperature Sensor(s)
Between Black and each TAN/BLK wire. No Continuity
Between each lead and ground No Continuity
Special Tools
1. Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) 91-823686A2
55117
Electrical Components
10 6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1)
8 11
25 Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--2)
9 12
13
7
6
5
14
15
16
3
2
37 36
36
35 40
1 32 41
30
4 23 17
38
21
22 18 19
26 34
20
25
39
29
46
48 49
44
47
51 43
52 42
28
31 45
55
27 50 53
54
NOTE: COAT ALL EYELET WIRING TERMINALS WITH #25 GACO N700 (LIQUID NEOPRENE 92-25711-2)
NOTE: COAT ALL MULTI-PIN ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (EXCEPT POWER TRIM RELAY CONNECTORS)
WITH #6 DC-4 (DIELECTRIC GREASE 92-823506--1)
Electrical Components
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 ELECTRICAL MOUNTING PLATE
2 6 IGNITION COIL
3 1 HI-TENSION CABLE
4 6 SPARK PLUG (HEAVY DUTY) 240 20 27
5 6 SPACER
6 6 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3-1/4 IN.)
7 1 MAP SENSOR
8 2 SCREW (M6 x 14) 35 4
9 1 TUBING (31 IN.)
10 4 SCREW (.312-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 235 19.6 26.5
11 4 WASHER
12 4 GROMMET
13 4 BUSHING
14 2 SCREW-engine harness ground (M6 x 14) 35 4
15 6 WASHER
16 6 NUT
17 1 TRIM HARNESS
18 3 RELAY
19 3 DECAL-Trim Relay
20 3 BRACKET
21 3 BUSHING
22 3 GROMMET
23 2 SCREW (M6 x 25) 35 4
24 1 SCREW (M6 x 35) 35 4
25 1 BUSHING
26 2 STA STRAP
27 1 ENGINE HARNESS
28 1 HARNESS (SERVICE ITEM)
29 4 FUSE
30 1 BRACKET-Fuse Holder
31 2 SCREW (M4 x 8)
32 1 ECU (135)
33 1 ECU (150)
34 1 PAD
35 3 SCREW (M6 x 25) 70 8
36 6 BUSHING
37 3 GROMMET
38 2 SCREW (M6 x 14) 100 11.5
39 1 CLIP
40 1 CLAMP
41 2 SCREW (10-16 x 3/8 IN.)
42 1 SOLENOID MOUNTING PLATE
43 3 SCREW (M6 x 12) 150 17
44 2 SCREW (M6 x 14) 35 4
45 1 STARTER SOLENOID
46 2 GROMMET
47 2 SCREW (M6 x 25) 35 4
48 1 CABLE (BLACK)
49 2 BUSHING
50 1 BATTERY CABLE (POSITIVE)
51 2 LOCKWASHER
52 2 NUT (5/16-18) 50 5.5
53 2 NUT (10-32) 8 0.9
54 1 CABLE
55 1 CAP NUT
Theory of Operation
When the ignition key is turned to the RUN position, battery voltage is applied to the main
relay through the PURPLE wire. When the Electronic Control Module (ECM) receives a
signal from the Crank Position Sensor, the main relay ground circuit is completed through
the ECM. The main relay is then closed and D.C. current from the battery or charging sys-
tem is transferred through the main relay 20 Amp fuse to the positive terminal of all 6 igni-
tion coil primary windings. The negative terminal of the coil primary is connected to engine
ground through the Electronic Control Module (ECM). When this circuit is closed, a mag-
netic field is allowed to be built up in the ignition coil. The Crank Position Sensor senses
the location of the 24 teeth on the flywheel and supplies a trigger signal to the ECM. When
the ECM receives this signal, the ECM will then open the ground circuit of the coil primary.
The magnetic field in the ignition coil primary will then collapse cutting across the coil sec-
ondary winding creating a high voltage charge (50,000 volts) that is sent to the spark plug.
Flywheel
24 teeth under the flywheel ring gear provide engine rpm and crankshaft position informa-
tion to the ECM through the crank position sensor.
Ignition Coils
Inductive type ignition coils are used on the DFI engines.
Ignition Coil Ohm Test
Temperature Sensor
Two (2) temperature sensors are used to provide cylinder head temperature information
to the ECM. One sensor is mounted in the starboard cylinder head and one in the air com-
pressor cylinder head. The ECM uses this information to increase injector pulse width for
cold starts and to retard timing in the event of an over-heat condition.
An ohms test of the temperature sensor would be as follows:
Insert digital or analog ohmmeter test leads into both TAN/BLACK sensor leads. With en-
gine at temperature (F) indicated, ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%.
270
255
240
225
210
195
Temperature Sensor
(F
180
Temperature )
165
150
135
120
105
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2
Resistance (k)
Temperature Sensor(s)
Between Black and each TAN/BLK wire. No Continuity
Between each lead and ground No Continuity
Fuel Injectors
6 fuel injectors (1 per cylinder) are used to provide fuel from the fuel rail to the direct injec-
tors. The fuel injectors are mounted in the fuel rail.
54871
a
c d
b
The Quicksilver Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) has been developed specifically to
help technicians diagnose and repair Mercury Marine 2 and 4 cycle engines.
Attach the diagnostic cable to the ECM diagnostic connector and plug in the software car-
tridge. You will be able to monitor sensors and ECM data values including status switches.
The ECM program can help diagnose intermittent engine problems. It will record the state
of the engine sensors and switches for a period of time and then can be played back to
review the recorded information.
Refer to the Digital Diagnostic Terminal Reference Manual for complete diagnostic proce-
dures.
Notes:
Ignition System:
– Check for proper operation by
using Inductive Timing Light
91-99379.
– Check battery voltage
(RED/YEL Lead) @ ignition
coils.
– Check for blown fuse (C15).
– Check battery voltage to fuse
from main power relay
(PURPLE Lead).
– Check for shorted stop wire
(BLK/YEL).
– Check crank position sensor
setting [0.015 in. – 0.040 in.
(0.38mm – 1.01mm)] from
flywheel or for defective crank
position sensor.
– Defective ECM.
Power Supply:
Clean and inspect remote control
male and female harness connec-
tors.
2. Engine cranks, starts and 2.0 Low air pressure in rail See 1.2
stalls
2.1 Low fuel pressure in rail See 1.2 and 1.3
2.2 Abnormally high friction in Check for scuffed piston or other
engine sources of high friction.
2.3 Air in fuel system/lines See 1.3 Crank and start engine
several times to purge.
2.4 TPS malfunction Check motion of throttle arm. Stop
nuts should contact block at idle
and WOT. Check TPS set-up. Must
connect DDT with adapter harness
(84-822560A5) to ECM.
2.5 Remote control to engine Clean and inspect male and fe-
harness connection is poor male connectors.
a - Vent Hose
INSTALLATION
Install flywheel cover as follows:
a. Place cover onto the front flange.
b. Push rear of the cover down onto the rear pin and air intake tube for the air com-
pressor.
c. Connect vent hose onto fitting.
d. Position hoses into holder.
d
c
a - Front Flange
b - Air Intake Tube
c - Fitting
d - Holder
Electronic Control Module (ECM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
2. Remove 3 bolts securing ECM.
ff
e ff
gg
dd
aa
cc
bb
a - Electronic Control Module
b - Bracket – Fuse Holder
c - Rubber Pad
d - Bolt (2) – Torque to 80 lb-in (9 N·m).
e - Bolt (3) – Torque to 80 lb-in (9 N·m)
f - Bushing
g - Rubber Grommet
INSTALLATION
1. Secure ECM to powerhead with 3 bolts.
2. Install rubber pad and bracket for the fuse holder.
3. Reconnect harness connectors.
ee
ff
aa gg
hh
bb
ii
c
c
bb
jj
d
56141
a - Bolts (6) –Torque to 80 lb-in (9 Nm).
b - Ignition Coils (6)
c - Spacer – Place on Bolts between coils
d - Electrical Mounting Plate
e - Bolts (4) – Torque to 235 lb-in (27 Nm).
f - Washer
g - Rubber Grommet
h - Bushing
i - Washer
j - Locknut (6)
INSTALLATION
1. Fasten coils to electrical mounting plate as shown.
2. Reinstall electrical mounting plate.
3. Reconnect spark plug lead and coil harness.
a
b
c
d
56069
a - Shim (0.010 or 0.020 in.) (0.254 mm 0.508 mm)
b - Crank Position Sensor
c - Washer
d - Bolt – Torque to 50 lb-in (5.5 Nm)
INSTALLATION
1. Fasten sensor to bracket with bolt.
2. Set air gap @ 0.025 in. – 0.040 in. (0.635 mm – 1.01 mm)
3. Reconnect sensor harness.
Throttle Position Sensors (TPS)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect wiring harness.
2. Remove screws securing sensors to bracket.
e
d
cc
bb
aa
ELECTRICAL
Section 2B – Charging & Starting System
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1 Disassembly and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-16
2
Battery Cable Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Rotor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18 B
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Stator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-19
Recommended Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-20
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-22
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Alternator Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-22
Charging a Discharged Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Starter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Winter Storage of Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Starter Motor Amperes Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Flywheel Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 Starter System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-6 Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-24
Flywheel/Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-8 Troubleshooting the Starter Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-25
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . 2B-26
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10 Starter Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27
Alternator Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27
Diagnosis of Alternator System on Engine . . . . . . 2B-11 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-28
Alternator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-28
Alternator System Circuitry Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Starter Cleaning, Inspection and Testing . . . . . . . 2B-30
Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-30
Sensing Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-30
Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14 Starter Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-32
Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Starter Solenoid Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-34
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Commander 2000 Key Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-35
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15
Specifications
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Wire Gage Size
Replacement Parts
WARNING
Electrical, ignition and fuel system components on your Mercury/Mariner out-
board are designed and manufactured to comply with U. S. Coast Guard Rules
and Regulations to minimize risks of fire and explosions. Use of replacement
electrical, ignition or fuel system components, which do not comply with these
rules and regulations, could result in a fire or explosion hazard and should be
avoided.
Recommended Battery
A 12 volt marine battery with a minimum Cold Cranking amperage rating of 750 amperes
or 1000 (minimum) Marine Cranking amperes should be used.
Special Tools
1. Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1or DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter
91-854009A1
a b
54964
4. Protector Cap 91-24161
Battery
Precautions
CAUTION
If battery acid comes in contact with skin or eyes, wash skin immediately with a
mild soap. Flush eyes with water immediately and see a doctor.
When charging batteries, an explosive gas mixture forms in each cell. Part of this gas es-
capes through holes in vent plugs and may form an explosive atmosphere around battery
if ventilation is poor. This explosive gas may remain in or around battery for several hours
after it has been charged. Sparks or flames can ignite this gas and cause an internal ex-
plosion which may shatter the battery.
The following precautions should be observed to prevent an explosion.
1. DO NOT smoke near batteries being charged or which have been charged very
recently.
2. DO NOT break live circuits at terminals of batteries because a spark usually occurs
at the point where a live circuit is broken. Always be careful when connecting or dis-
connecting cable clamps on chargers. Poor connections are a common cause of elec-
trical arcs which cause explosions.
3. DO NOT reverse polarity of battery terminal to cable connections.
2. When adding distilled water to battery, be extremely careful not to fill more than 3/16
in. (4.8 mm) above perforated baffles inside battery. Battery solution or electrolyte ex-
pands from heat caused by charging. Overfilling battery will cause electrolyte to over-
flow (if filled beyond 3/16″ above baffles).
3. Grease terminal bolts well with 2-4-C Marine Lubricant and store battery in a COOL-
DRY place. Remove battery from storage every 30-45 days, check water level and
put on charge for 5 or 6 hours at 6 amperes. DO NOT FAST CHARGE.
4. If specific gravity drops below 1.240, check battery for reason and recharge. When
gravity reaches 1.260, discontinue charging. To check specific gravity, use a hydrom-
eter, which can be purchased locally.
5. Repeat preceding charging procedure every 30-45 days, as long as battery is in stor-
age, for best possible maintenance during inactive periods to ensure a good service-
able battery in spring. When ready to place battery back in service, remove excess
grease from terminals (a small amount is desirable on terminals at all times), recharge
again as necessary and reinstall battery.
WARNING
Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel during removal and installa-
tion; therefore, disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs to pre-
vent engine from starting.
2. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs.
3. While holding flywheel with flywheel holder (91-52344), remove flywheel nut and
washer.
57415
4. Install a crankshaft Protector Cap (91-24161) on end of crankshaft, then install Fly-
wheel Puller (91-73687A2) into flywheel.
5. Hold flywheel tool with wrench while tightening bolt down on protector cap. Tighten
bolt until flywheel comes free.
57413
NOTE: Neither heat or hammer should be used on flywheel to aid in removal as damage
to flywheel or electrical components under flywheel may result.
6. Remove flywheel. Inspect flywheel for cracks or damage.
Installation
IMPORTANT: Do not apply grease to the flywheel taper or corresponding crank-
shaft splines. The application of grease to these areas will result in flywheel hub
breakage when tightening flywheel nut.
1. Install flywheel.
2. Install flywheel washer and nut.
3. Hold flywheel with Flywheel Holder (91-52344). Torque nut to 125 lb-ft (169.5 Nm).
57414
Notes:
Flywheel/Alternator
22
18
21
23 17
20
19
20
27
16
25
15
26
24
3
2
4
10
6
11
7
7
12
13 7
5
5
8
14 4
9
4
14 9
Flywheel/Alternator
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 ALTERNATOR
2 1 SCREW (M10 x 100) 480 40 54
3 1 SCREW (M10 x120) 275 23 31
4 3 WASHER
5 3 MOUNT
6 1 BRACKET
7 3 WASHER
8 1 BRACKET
9 2 NUT 275 23 31
10 1 SCREW (M10 x 55) 275 23 31
11 1 CABLE
12 1 PIN
13 1 BRACKET
14 3 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1 IN.) 185 15.5 21
15 1 SPRING
16 1 BELT TENSIONER
17 1 STUD (M10 x 85)
18 1 NUT 180 15 20
19 1 BUSHING
20 2 WASHER
21 1 PULLEY
22 1 SCREW (M10 x 35) 300 25 34
23 1 BELT
24 1 FLYWHEEL
25 1 NUT 125 169
26 1 WASHER
27 1 PLUG
System Components
The battery charging system consists of the alternator, battery, ignition switch, starter
solenoid and the wiring which connects these components.
aa
dd
bb
To
51708
a - Alternator
b - Battery
c - 20 Ampere Fuse
d - Starter Solenoid
Precautions
The following precautions must be observed when working on the alternator system. Fail-
ure to observe these precautions may result in serious damage to the alternator system.
1. Do not attempt to polarize the alternator.
2. Do not short across or ground any of the terminals on the alternator, except as specifi-
cally instructed.
3. Never disconnect the alternator output lead, regulator harness or battery cables when
the alternator is being driven by the engine.
4. Always remove NEGATIVE (–) battery cable from battery before working on alternator
system.
5. When installing battery, be sure to connect the NEGATIVE (–) (GROUNDED) battery
cable to NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal and the POSITIVE (+) battery cable to POSI-
TIVE (+) battery terminal.
6. When using a charger or booster battery, connect it in parallel with existing battery
(POSITIVE to POSITIVE; NEGATIVE to NEGATIVE).
Alternator Description
The alternator employs a rotor, which is supported in 2 end frames by ball bearings, and
is driven at 2.5 times engine speed. The rotor contains a field winding enclosed between
2 multiple-finger pole pieces. The ends of the field winding are connected to 2 brushes
which make continuous sliding contact with the slip rings. The current (flowing through
the field winding) creates a magnetic field that causes the adjacent fingers of the pole
pieces to become alternate north and south magnetic poles.
A 3-phase stator is mounted directly over the rotor pole pieces and between the 2 end
frames. It consists of 3 windings wound 120° electrically out-of-phase on the inside of a
laminated core. The windings are connected together on one end, while the other ends
are connected to a full-wave rectifier bridge.
The rectifier bridge contains 8 diodes which allows current to flow from ground, through
the stator and to the output terminal, but not in the opposite direction.
When current is supplied to the rotor field winding, and the rotor is turned, the movement
of the magnetic fields created induces an alternating current into the stator windings. The
rectifier bridge changes this alternating current to direct current which appears at the out-
put terminal. A diode trio is connected to the stator windings to supply current to the regu-
lator and the rotor field during operation.
Voltage output of the alternator is controlled by a transistorized voltage regulator that
senses the voltage at the battery and regulates the field current to maintain alternator volt-
age for properly charging the battery. Current output of the alternator does not require reg-
ulation, as maximum current output is self-limited by the design of the alternator. As long
as the voltage is regulated within the prescribed limits, the alternator cannot produce ex-
cessive current. A cutout relay in the voltage regulator also is not required, as the rectifier
diodes prevent the battery from discharging back through the stator.
A small amount of current is supplied by the excitation circuit in the regulator to the rotor
field to initially start the alternator charging. Once the alternator begins to produce output,
field current is supplied solely by the diode trio.
The alternator is equipped with 2 fans which induce air flow through the alternator to re-
move heat created by the rectifier and stator.
Alternator Assembly
g
ff
jj i
ee
hh
c aa
dd b 51683
a - Pulley Nut
b - Pulley
c - Spacer
d - Frame and Rotor Assembly
e - Brush Holder
f - Brush Cover
g - Regulator
h - Rectifier (Diode Assembly)
i - Insulator
j - End Cover
aa
20304060
5 1015 100OHMS
0 200
30 20
40 15 10 10
20 8 6 4 5
10 00
2 VOLTS
0
DC AMPS
DCV
ACV
DVA
56113
a - Terminal B
Sensing Circuit
1. Unplug RED and PURPLE lead connector from alternator.
2. Connect POSITIVE (+) voltmeter lead to RED lead and NEGATIVE (–) voltmeter lead
to ground.
3. Voltmeter should indicate battery voltage. If correct voltage is not present, check
sensing circuit (RED lead) for loose or dirty connections or damaged wiring.
aa
56114
a - Sense Lead (RED)
Voltage Output
1. Using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, connect POSITIVE (+) lead of voltmeter to TERMINAL
B of alternator and NEGATIVE (–) lead of voltmeter to engine ground.
2. Start engine and allow to warm up. Increase engine RPM from idle to 2000. Normal
voltage output should be 13.5 – 15.1 volts. If voltage reading is greater than normal,
replace voltage regulator.
3. If voltage reading is less than normal, fabricate a tool from a piece of stiff wire to the
following specifications:
aa
20304060
5 1015 100OHMS
0 200
30 20
40 15 10 10
20 8 6 4 5
10 00
2 VOLTS
0
DC AMPS
DCV
ACV
0.060 in. (1.52 mm)
DVA
56113
a - Terminal B
4. Insert bent end of tool through end cover and ground TERMINAL F.
b
20
OHMS604030 1510 5
100 0
200 20 30
10 10 15 40
5 20
00 2 4 6 8 10
VOLTS
0
DC AMPS
DCV
ACV
DVA
51683
aa
cc
56115
a - Terminal F
b - Tool
c - Jumper Wire to Engine Ground (Attach to end of Tool)
5. With TERMINAL F grounded, voltage should rise to within the normal range (13.5 –
15.1). If voltage rises, replace the regulator.
6. If the voltage DOES NOT rise to within the normal range with TERMINAL F grounded,
perform “CURRENT OUTPUT” test.
Current Output
1. With engine shut off, install ammeter (capable of reading 60+ amperes) in series be-
tween TERMINAL B on alternator and POSITIVE (+) terminal of battery.
2. Start engine and allow to warm up. Advance RPM to 2000.
3. Insert tool, previously fabricated for VOLTAGE OUTPUT, through end cover and
ground TERMINAL F.
a
b e 56116
a - Terminal F
b - Tool
c - Jumper Wire to Engine Ground
d - Terminal B
e - Ammeter
Repair
Removal
1. Remove top cowling.
2. Disconnect battery cables from battery.
3. Disconnect wiring harness from alternator.
4. Remove pivot bolt and tension bolt.
aa
bb
aa
56117
a - Attaching Bolt
b - Harnesses
d
d
fb
b
ea
51680
aa 51683
a - Cover
b - Screws
c - Nut
d - Insulator
e - Regulator
f - Brush Assembly
g - Screws
NOTE: Proper regulator operation can be determined by VOLTAGE OUTPUT and CUR-
RENT OUTPUT, previous. If regulator does not meet specifications, replace regulator.
Torque regulator screws to 17 lb-in (2 Nm).
NOTE: Brushes are replaced as an assembly. Inspect assembly for stuck brushes or ex-
cessive brush wear. Normal exposed brush length is 0.156 in. (4.0 mm). Minimum ex-
posed brush length is 0.059 in. (1.5 mm).
3. Remove 4 screws securing rectifier (diode assembly) to alternator.
b
b 51684
a - Screws
b - Rectifier (Diode Assembly)
NOTE: To test rectifier assembly, touch POSITIVE (+) lead from ohmmeter to POSITIVE
stud and NEGATIVE (–) lead from ohmmeter to each diode terminal. The ohmmeter
should indicate continuity.
aa
c bb
51679
a - Positive Stud
b - Positive Ohm Lead
c - Negative Ohm Lead
Reverse leads – NEGATIVE lead on POSITIVE stud and POSITIVE lead on each diode
assembly. NO CONTINUITY should be observed. If continuity is observed in both tests,
or NO CONTINUITY is observed in both tests, the rectifier assembly is defective and must
be replaced. Torque rectifier screws to 17 lb-in (1.9 Nm).
bb c
aa 51679
a - Positive Stud
b - Negative Ohm Lead
c - Positive Ohm Lead
IMPORTANT: The regulator, rectifier and brush assembly are the only components
individually replaceable on this alternator. If the rotor or stator is defective, the en-
tire rotor, stator and housing must be replaced as an assembly.
IMPORTANT: Clean anti-corrosion paint from electrical connections prior to reas-
sembly. Coat all electrical connections with LIQUID NEOPRENE (92-25711-1).
Rotor Test
1. Inspect slip ring surface for roughness, abnormal wear and/or burning. If such condi-
tions exist, rotor is not considered serviceable and alternator should be replaced.
2. Measure the outer diameter of the slip rings using vernier calipers. STANDARD DI-
AMETER: 0.567 in. (14.4 mm); MINIMUM DIAMETER: 0.551 in. (14 mm). If slip ring
diameter is less than minimum, rotor is not considered serviceable and alternator
should be replaced.
51680
51684
a - Slip Rings
3. Inspect rotor for an open circuit. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between slip
rings. Resistance should not exceed 3 ohms. If no continuity exists, rotor is defective.
4. Check rotor for short to ground. NO CONTINUITY should exist between slip rings and
rotor shaft. If CONTINUITY exists, rotor is defective.
aa aa
bb
51682 51683
a - Slip Rings
b - Rotor Shaft
Stator Test
1. With rectifier removed, use an ohmmeter to check for a short circuit between each
stator lead and the stator frame. If CONTINUITY exists, stator is defective.
aa
bb
51682
a - Stator Leads
b - Frame
2. Inspect stator for open circuit. Using an ohmmeter, check for an open circuit between
each of the stator leads. If no continuity exists, stator is defective.
aa
51682
a - Stator Leads
Reassembly
1. Position rectifier assembly over stator leads.
2. Form stator leads in a clockwise loop and secure leads to rectifier with 4 screws.
Torque screws to 17 lb-in (1.9 Nm).
b
aa
c
a
db
ac
bb
51683
d
b 51684
a - Rectifier Assembly
b - Stator Leads
c - Stator Leads
d - Screws [Torque to 17 lb-in (1.9 Nm)]
3. Secure regulator to alternator with 2 screws [1 in. (25.4 mm) long]; 1 screw [0.25 in.
(6.4 mm) long] and lockwashers. DO NOT tighten screws at this time.
4. Secure brush assembly with 2 screws – [0.25 in. (6.4 mm) long] and [0.312 in. (8.0
mm) long].
cf
eb
cc
d
a
51680
aa b 51684
a - Regulator
b - Screws [1 in. (25.4 mm)]
c - Screw [0.25 in. (6.4 mm)]
d - Brush Assembly
e - Screw [0.25 in. (6.4 mm)]
f - Screw [0.312 in. (8.0 mm)]
5. Install end cover. Secure cover with 3 screws. Torque screws to 23 lb-in. (2.5 Nm).
Install terminal insulator. Torque nut to 36 lb-in (4 Nm).
dd
cc
bb
aa
51683
a - Cover
b - Screw [Torque to 23 lb-in (2.5 Nm)]
c - Terminal Insulator
d - Nut [Torque to 36 lb-in. (4 Nm)]
Pulley
1. While holding rotor shaft, remove pulley nut.
2. Before reinstalling pulley, verify spacer is installed on rotor shaft.
a
ad
bb
51679
51683
a - Pulley
b - Rotor Shaft
c - Nut
d - Spacer
Installation
1. Secure alternator to engine block with attaching bolts. Torque top bolt to 40 lb-ft (54
Nm). Torque bottom bolt to 35 lb-ft (47.5 Nm).
2. Install alternator belt in V-groove of flywheel and alternator pulley.
3. Reconnect electrical harness to alternator.
aa
cc
b
56117
a - Top Bolt [Torque to 40 lb-ft (54 Nm)]
b - Bottom Bolt [Torque to 35 lb-ft. (47.5 Nm)]
c - Harnesses
aa
56142
a - Belt Tensioner Assembly
Starter System
Starter Motor Amperes Draw
STARTER MOTOR NO LOAD NORMAL
PART NO. AMP. DRAW AMP. DRAW
50-833153-1 30 AMPS 165 AMPS
Description
The battery supplies electricity to activate the starter motor. When the ignition is turned
to the “START” position, the starter solenoid is energized and completes the starter circuit
between the battery and starter.
The neutral start switch opens the starter circuit when the shift control lever is not in neu-
tral thus preventing accidental starting when the engine is in gear.
CAUTION
The starter motor may be damaged if operated continuously. DO NOT operate
continuously for more than 30 seconds. Allow a 2 minute cooling period between
starting attempts.
Starter Motor
4
3
5
14 2
15
10
17 7
8
6
9
15 11
14 13 12 7
18 16
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24)
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 STARTER MOTOR
2 1 DRIVE CAP
3 2 THRU BOLT 70 8
4 1 DRIVE KIT
5 1 PINION
6 1 ARMATURE
7 1 BRUSH/SPRING KIT
8 1 BRUSH HOLDER
9 1 COMMUTATOR CAP
10 2 SCREW Drive Tight
11 1 LOCKWASHER
12 1 NUT (1/4-20) 35 4.0
13 1 LOCKWASHER
14 1 NUT (1/4-20) 35 4.0
15 3 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-3/4) 210 17.5 24
16 1 BATTERY CABLE (NEGATIVE)
17 1 DECAL-Warning-High Voltage
18 1 BOOT
STARTER
TO ALTERNATOR
BATTERY
77
22
11
20 AMP FUSE 66
33
STARTER
SOLENOID
44
Starter Circuit
TEST 1
Use an ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) and connect meter leads
between NEGATIVE (–) battery post and common power-
head ground.
Test 2
a. Disconnect BLACK ground wire(s) from Test Point 2.
No voltage reading: b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2.
proceed to TEST 3. c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
TEST 4
a. Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
engine ground and Test Point 4. Neutral start switch is open or YELLOW/RED
No voltage reading: wire is open between Test Points 4 and 3.
proceed to Test 5 b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
TEST 5
Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
No voltage reading:
engine ground and Test Point 5 Defective ignition switch.
proceed to Test 6
TEST 6
Check for voltage between common engine ground and Test Point 6.
*Battery Voltage
TEST 7
a. Connect voltmeter between common engine and Test Point1.
b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
TEST 8
a. Reconnect BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) to starter solenoid Test
Point 1.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
No voltage reading:
Check BLACK cable (with YELLOW
12 Volt Reading*
sleeve) for poor connection or open circuit. If starter motor does not turn, check starter motor.
*Battery Voltage
cc
52135
a - BLACK (with YELLOW sleeve) POSITIVE (+) 12-Volt Cable
b - Upper Mounting Bolts
c - Lower Mounting Bolt
Installation
1. Secure starter to engine with 3 bolts. Use Left top bolt to attach BLACK NEGATIVE
(–) battery cable.
Torque top attaching bolts to 23 lb-ft (31 Nm). Torque bottom attaching bolt to 21 lb-ft
(28.5 Nm).
2. Secure BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) to POSITIVE (+) terminal on starter.
Torque nut to 60 lb-in (7 Nm).
aa
c bb
52135
a - Top Bolts [Torque to 23 lb-ft (31 Nm)]
b - Bottom Bolt [Torque to 21 lb-ft (28.5 Nm)]
c - BLACK Cable (with YELLOW sleeve)
d - Nut [Torque to 60 lb-in (7 Nm)]
Disassembly
1. Remove starter as outlined in “Starter Removal and Installation,” preceding.
2. Remove 2 through bolts from starter.
3. Tap commutator end cap to loosen and remove from frame. Do not loose brush
springs.
aa
11646
b
a - Through Bolts
b - Commutator End Cap
4. Brush replacement is recommended if brushes are pitted, chipped or worn to less than
0.25 in. (6.4 mm). If necessary, remove brushes as follows:
a. Remove hex nut and washers from POSITIVE (+) terminal and remove POSITIVE
brushes and terminal as an assembly.
b. Remove 2 bolts securing NEGATIVE (–) brushes and brush holder to end cap.
a cc
bb
c
d bb 11656
a - Brush Holder
b - Positive Brushes
c - Negative Brushes
d - Positive Terminal
ed
aa ba c
b dc
51711 11658
CAUTION
Do not turn down the commutator excessively.
a. Resurface the commutator and undercut the insulation between the commutator
bars 1/32 in. (0.8mm) to the full width of the insulation and so that the undercut
is flat.
b. Clean the commutator slots after undercutting.
c. Sand the commutator lightly with No. 00 sandpaper to remove burrs, then clean
the commutator.
d. Recheck the armature on a growler for shorts as specified in the following proce-
dure (“Testing”).
8. Open-circuited armatures often can be repaired. The most likely place for an open cir-
cuit is at the commutator bars, as a result of long cranking periods. Long cranking peri-
ods overheat the starter motor so that solder in the connections melts and is thrown
out. The resulting poor connections then cause arcing and burning of the commutator
bars.
9. Repair bars, that are not excessively burned, by resoldering the leads in bars (using
rosin flux solder) and turning down the commutator in a lathe to remove burned mate-
rial, then undercut the mica.
10. Clean out the copper or brush dust from slots between the commutator bars.
11. Check the armature for ground. See the following procedure (“Testing”).
Testing
Armature Test for Shorts
Check armature for short circuits by placing on growler and holding hack saw blade over
armature core while armature is rotated. If saw blade vibrates, armature is shorted. Re-
check after cleaning between commutator bars. If saw blade still vibrates, replace arma-
ture.
11669
51711
Checking Positive Brushes and Terminal
Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Connect meter leads between POSITIVE brushes. Meter
must indicate full continuity or zero resistance. If resistance is indicated, inspect lead to
brush and lead to POSITIVE terminal solder connection. If connection cannot be repaired,
brushes must be replaced.
51711
a - POSITIVE (+) Brushes
Testing Negative Brushes for Ground
Set ohmmeter to (R x1 scale). Place one lead of the ohmmeter on the NEGATIVE brush
and the other lead on the end cap (bare metal). If the meter indicates NO continuity, re-
place the NEGATIVE brush. Repeat this procedure on the other NEGATIVE brush.
Starter Reassembly
1. If brushes were removed, replace as follows:
a. Install POSITIVE brushes (along with POSITIVE terminal) into commutator end
cap.
aa
b hb
cc
ci
d
d
ee ga
51713
ff
52131
a - End Cap
b - POSITIVE Brushes
c - POSITIVE Terminal
d - Insulating Block
e - Insulating Washer
f - Hex Nut
g - POSITIVE (+) Terminal
h - Long Brush Lead
i - Push Lead into Slot
bb
aa c
dd
dd
b a 11656
a - POSITIVE (+) Brushes
b - NEGATIVE (–) Brushes
c - Brush Holder
d - Bolts (Fasten NEGATIVE Brushes and Holder)
2. If removed, reinstall parts on armature shaft. Use a new locknut and tighten securely
on end of shaft.
d
d
ee gg
a b ff
c
11658
a - Locknut
b - Spacer
c - Spring
d - Drive Assembly
e - Drive End Cap
f - Armature Shaft
g - Washer
3. Lubricate helix threads on armature shaft with a drop of SAE 10W oil.
4. Lubricate bushing in drive end plate with a drop of SAE 10W oil.
5. Position armature into starter frame.
6. Lubricate bushing (located in commutator end cap) with one drop of SAE 10W oil. DO
NOT overlubricate.
7. To prevent damage to brushes and springs when installing commutator end cap, it is
recommended that a brush retaining tool be made as shown:
1-3/4″
(44.5 mm)
aa
5″
(127.0 mm)
8. Place springs and brushes into brush holder and hold in place with brush retainer tool.
9. Install commutator end cap onto starter frame. Align marks on frame with alignment
marks on end caps. Remove brush retainer tool. Install through bolts and torque to
70 lb-in (8 Nm).
ba
51713
52130
a - Brush Retainer Tool
b - Alignment Marks
DCV ACV
DVA
33 11
b 44
22
a - 12-VOLT Supply
b - VOA Leads
OFF
RUN
START
CHOKE*
ELECTRICAL
Section 2C – Timing, Synchronizing & Adjusting
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1 Throttle Plate Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6
2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Adjustment . . . . . . 2C-6 C
Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4 Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6
Throttle Cam Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Maximum Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Specifications
Special Tools
1. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1
dd
56069
dd ee 56061
a - Roller Arm Screw
b - Roller
c - Throttle Cam
d - Wide Open Throttle Stop Screw
e - Idle Stop Screw
Maximum Throttle
1. Hold throttle arm against full throttle stop.
2. Adjust full throttle stop screw (located behind electric fuel pump) to allow full throttle
valve opening while maintaining a 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) clearance between arm of
throttle shaft and stop on attenuator box.
3. Tighten jam nut on full throttle stop screw.
4. Check for free play (roller lifts from cam) between roller and cam at full throttle to pre-
vent linkage from binding. Readjust full throttle stop screw, if necessary.
dd
ee
ff a
cc
bb
56062
a - Throttle Arm d - Throttle Shaft Arm
b - Stop e - 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) Clearance
c - Full Throttle Stop f - Stop on Attenuator Box
Screw
Throttle Plate Screw
IMPORTANT: DO NOT adjust throttle plate stop screw from factory setting. Howev-
er, should the throttle plate require adjustment, use the throttle plate stop screw
to set the throttle plate clearance @ 0.045 in. (1.143 mm) using a #56 drill.
a
bb
56151
a - Throttle Plate Stop Screw
b - Throttle Plate Clearance – Set @ 0.045 in. (1.143mm)
Idle Speed
Engine idle speed is not adjustable. The parameters affecting idle speed can be checked
and monitored by the DDT. Refer to the DDT Reference Manual for complete details.
ELECTRICAL
Section 2D – Wiring Diagrams
Table of Contents
2
Power Trim Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-2 Oil Level Gauge Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-12
D
Instrument Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-3 Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram . . . . . . 2D-14
Commander 3000 Classic Panel Remote Control . 2D-4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-15
Commander 3000 Panel Remote Control . . . . . . . . 2D-5 Multi-Function Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-16
Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram . 2D-6 Dip Switch Setting/Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-16
Oil Level Gauge Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-7 Outboard Multi-Function Gauge Setting . . . . 2D-17
Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram Warning System Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-18
(Dual Outboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-8 Warning System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-19
QSI Gauge Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-10 Panel Mount Remote Control Wiring Installation 2D-22
Tachometer Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-10 1998 135/150 DFI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-23
Water Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-11 1999 135/150 DFI Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-24
cc
bb
aa
dd
m
m
ll
ee
ff
gg
kk
hh
j i
aa bb
cc
d TAN/WHT
TAN/BLK
51820
Temperature/Oil
To 12V Warning Panel Volt Meter
aa b
c
dd TAN/WHT
TAN/BLK 51819
BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
RED = Red
Tan = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark
RED
PURPLE
GREEN
aa
BLK=BLACK f
BLU=BLUE g
BRN=BROWN
GRN=GREEN
GRY=GRAY
PUR=PURPLE dd
RED=RED
TAN=TAN
WHT=WHITE ee
YEL=YELLOW
cc aa
bb
jj
kk
h
ii
jj
52204
a
- Ignition/Choke Switch
b
- Lanyard Stop Switch
c
- Lead Not Used on Outboard Installations
d
- Retainer
e
- Tachometer
f
- Trim Indicator Gauge (Optional)
g
- Temperature Gauge
h
- Remote Control
i
- Power Trim Harness Connector
j
- Connect Wires Together w/Screw and Nut (2 Places); Apply Liquid Neoprene
to Connections and Slide Rubber Sleeve over each Connection.
k - Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit
IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back any
unused wiring harness leads.
d ff
cc
gg
bb
aa
q
rr
pp ss hh
oo t
nn
jj
m
m l
k ii
a - To 12 Volt Source
b - PURPLE Wire (Connect to Trim Indicator Gauge “I” [or POSITIVE (+) 12 Volt
Source that is Turned “ON” and “OFF” with Ignition Switch])
c - Oil Level Gauge
d - BLACK Wire (Connects to NEGATIVE Ground)
e - To Ground
f - BLACK Wire (From Gauge to Oil Clip Connector)
g - LIGHT BLUE Sender Lead to Gauge
h - Wiring Harness (LT. BLU. and BLACK)
i - Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.)
j - Spring
k - Oil Clip Connector
l - Adaptor Housing
m - Screw (10-16 x 1/4 in.)
n - Spring
o - Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.)
p - BLACK Wire
q - Oil Level Sender Unit
r - Oil Pick-Up Tube
s - WHITE Lead (from Oil Level Sender)
t - Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.)
d kk dd
cc b
gg
BLK=BLACK l
BATT GND
BLU=BLUE d
BRN=BROWN
GRN=GREEN SENDER
GRY=GRAY
PUR=PURPLE ee
RED=RED aa
TAN=TAN
WHT=WHITE
YEL=YELLOW
ff
nn
oo
hh nn
a - Ignition/Choke Switch
b - Lanyard Stop Switch
c - Lead not used on Outboard Installations
d - Retainer
e - Tachometer
f - Trim Indicator Gauge
g - Temperature Gauge
h - Remote Control
IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and
isolate unused wiring harness leads.
gg
BATT GND
ii
SENDER
aa
ee
jj
ff
oo
m
m
i - Synchronizer Gauge
j - Synchronizer Module
k - Lanyard Switch (Isolation) Diode
l - Y Harness
m - Power Trim Harness Connector
n - Connect Wires together with Screw and Nut (4 Places); Apply Liquid Neo-
prene to Connections and slide Rubber Sleeve over each Connection.
o - Lead to Visual Warning Kit
a d
51106
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
c - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
d - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
WIRING DIAGRAM B
Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.)
b
a
c
51106
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
c - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
d
a
SEND
e
a - Connect to + 12 Volt
b - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
c - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
d - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
e - Connect to TAN Lead located at the Tachometer Receptacle on Commander
Side Mount Remote Control or TAN Lead coming from Accessory Ignition/
Choke Assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM B
Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key is turned on.)
b
c
a
SEND
d 51105
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
c - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
d - Connect to TAN Lead located at the Tachometer Receptacle on Commander
Side Mount Remote Control or TAN Lead coming from Accessory Ignition/
Choke Assembly
Route TAN lead on starboard side of engine to engine/remote control harness. Connect
as shown.
IMPORTANT: Tape back and isolate any unused wiring harness leads.
28086
a - Lead from Temperature Sender
b - Engine/Remote Control Harness
Oil Level Gauge Wiring
LIGHT BULB POSITION A
Use this position when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
b
51109
a - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
b - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
51112
a - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
b - Sender
SENDER WIRING
a
51108
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
SEND
51105
a - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
51106
a - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
b - Sender
Synchronizer wiring can be accomplished two different ways as an option to the user.
GRY=GRAY
WHT=WHITE
BLK=BLACK dd
PUR=PURPLE
51107
a - Tachometer Starboard Engine
b - Synchronizer Gauge
c - Tachometer Port Engine
d - Synchronizer Module
GRY=GRAY
WHT=WHITE
BLK=BLACK d
PUR=PURPLE 51107
Maintenance
Clean gauge by washing with fresh water to remove sand and salt deposits. Wipe off with
a soft cloth moistened with water. The gauge may be scored or damaged if wiped with
abrasive material (sand, saline or detergent compounds, etc.) or washed with solvents
such as trichloroethylene, turpentine, etc.
Multi-Function Gauge
Dip Switch Setting/Testing
NOTE: The multi-function gauge “Dip Switch” must be set on the back of gauge prior to
operation. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position before setting dip switch. The
gauge will reset to selected settings when the ignition is turned “On”.
IMPORTANT: Test the gauge and related wiring BEFORE making final “Dip Switch”
settings and BEFORE securing the gauge to dashboard of boat.
1. With the ignition switch in the “Off” position, set the multi-function gauge “Dip Switch”
in (test) position as shown. (BLACK dot indicates switch position).
a
aa
1 2 3 4
b
Open
52095
a - “Dip Switch” (shown in test position)
b - Black Dot - Switch in “Open” Position
2. Turn ignition switch to the “Run” position. The multi-function gauge now is in the dis-
play test mode. The gauge Temp, Batt, Oil, and Fuel red warning lights should be alter-
nately flashing “On” and “Off”; the BLACK L.C.D. bar graphs should be cycling. (This
indicates that all gauge functions are operational).
3. Turn ignition switch to the “Off” position. Reset the gauge “Dip Switch” to the correct
operating position for the outboard application.
aa
Open
275 hp (3.4 Litre) Outboards (single engine)
1 2 3 4
Open
135-250 hp Outboards (single engine)
1 2 3 4
Open
“Note” On Dual Engine/Single Fuel Tank
1 2 3 4
Applications: Position Dip Switch 4 “Open”
*
Open
* Dip Switch (4) in “Open Position” For Dual Engine Single Fuel Tank Applications.
Switches 1, 2, 3 Must Be In Specified Model Position.
Warning System
The outboard warning system incorporates warning light gauge (a) and warning horn (b).
The warning horn is located inside the remote control or is part of the ignition key switch
wiring harness.
bb
b
b
aa
When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the warning lights and horn will turn on
for a moment as a test to tell you the system is working.
aa
The system is activated when the oil in the engine mounted oil reservoir tank drops below
22 fl. oz. (175 ml) You still have an oil reserve remaining for 30 minutes of full speed opera-
tion.
NOTE: The engine mounted oil reservoir tank (located beneath the top cowl) along with
the remote oil tank will have to be refilled.
The OIL light (a) will come on and the warning horn sounds a series of four short tones.
If you continue to operate the outboard, the light will stay on and the horn will sound four
short tones every two minutes. The engine has to be shut off to reset the warning system.
aa
bb
The system is activated when the flow of oil to the oil pump is blocked. No lubricating oil
is being supplied to the engine. Stop the engine as soon as possible. Continuing to oper-
ate the engine can result in severe engine damage.
The OIL light (a) and CHECK ENGINE light (b) will come on and the warning horn will be-
gin sounding. The warning system will automatically reduce and limit the engine speed
to 3000 RPM. The engine has to be shut off to reset the warning system.
ENGINE OVERHEAT
aa
The system is activated if an ignition coil, sensor or injector is not functioning correctly.
The CHECK ENGINE light (a) will turn on.
a
The system is activated if the throttle sensors are not functioning correctly.
The CHECK ENGINE light (a) will turn on and the warning horn will begin sounding.
The water level detection warning is activated when water in the water separating fuel fil-
ter reaches the full level. The water can be removed from the filter.
The WATER DETECTION light (a) will come on and the warning horn will begin sounding
a series of four beeps. If you continue to operate the outboard, the light will stay on and
the horn will sound every two minutes.
aa
The system is activated when the engine speed exceeds the maximum allowable RPM.
Anytime the engine over-speed system is activated, the warning horn (a) begins to sound
continuously. The system will automatically reduce the engine speed to within the allow-
able limit.
NOTE: Engine speed should never reach the maximum limit to activate the system unless
the propeller is ventilating, an incorrect propeller is being used, or the propeller is faulty.
s
kk
ll oo
jj nn
p
m
m
t
qq
BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark
25
Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--2)
a - (+) 12 Volt Terminal j - Multi-Function Gauge
b - (–) Ground Terminal k - Multi-Function Adapter Har-
c - Speedometer ness
d - Tachometer l - To Fuel Sender (Optional)
e - Tachometer Signal Terminal m - To Oil Sender (Optional)
f - Connect Wires Together with n - Two Wire Harness
Screw and Hex Nut (3 o - Ignition/Choke Switch
Places); Apply Quicksilver Liq- p - Low Oil Sender Lead
uid Neoprene to Connections q - Over Temperature Switch
and Slide Rubber Sleeve Over Lead
Each Connection. r - Panel Mount Remote Control
g - Power Trim Connector s - To Engine
h - Horn t - To Engine
i - 8 Pin Harness Connector u - Neutral Safety Switch Lead
GRY
BLK
PPL
4 - Direct Injector #1 B A B A B A
5 - Direct Injector #2 B A B A B A B A B A B A A B C D C B A C B A C B A
PNK/ORG
ORG/PNK
PNK/BRN
PNK/RED
BRN/PNK
RED/PNK
A B C
6 - Direct Injector #3
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
WHT/YEL
ORG/WHT
WHT/DK.BLU
DK.BLU/WHT
WHT/RED
RED/WHT
YEL/WHT
WHT/ORG
WHT/PPL
PPL/WHT
BLK
RED/YEL
YEL
BLU/YEL
BLK/GRN
BLK/ORG
LT.BLU/WHT
PPL/YEL
LT.BLU/GRN
BLK/ORG
LT.BLU/BLK
GRY/RED
PPL/YEL
BLK/GRN
LT.BLU/RED
BLU/YEL
7 - Direct Injector #4
8 - Direct Injector #5
9 - Direct Injector #6
10 - Oil Pump
11 - MAP Sensor
12 - T.P.S. #1 (Inner)
13 - T.P.S. #2 (Outer)
14 - Crank Position Sensor
15 - Air Temperature Sensor BLK
LT.BLU/GRN
LT.BLU/RED
LT.BLU/BLK
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
BRN/WHT
PNK/ORG
WHT/BRN
ORG/PNK
BLK/ORG
PNK/BRN
BRN/PNK
RED/BLU
RED/BLU
20 - Digital Diagnostic Terminal Connector GRN/PPL 1 PPL/YEL 1 PPL
BLK
BLK
YEL
21 - Compressor Temperature Sensor PPL/WHT 2 2 BLU/YEL
PNK/PPL 3 3 LT.BLU/WHT BLK/ORG
22 - Fuel Pump 20 Ampere Fuse 4
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 BLK/ORG BLK
21 21 TAN TAN/BLU
33 - Check Engine Light BLK/TAN
GRN/BLU 22 22 BLK/TAN BLK
34 - Water In Fuel Light GRN/ORG 23
37 23
GRN/BRN 24 24 YEL/PPL
35 - Over-Heat Light
41 36 25
GRN/BLU
GRN/RED
GRN/PPL
GRN/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
PNK/PPL
PPL/PNK
PNK/YEL
YEL/PNK
BLK
33 21
BLK
BLK
BLK
87a
87a
30
85
87
30
30
85
86
87
86
85
87
86
GRN/WHT
BLK
GRN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLU
RED
45 - Starter
RED/PPL
RED/WHT
PPL
YEL/PPL
B
LT.BLU/WHT
LT.BLU/WHT
RED/BLU
31 32 1 BLK/YEL
46 - Ignition Coil #6 54 53 52 2 PPL
YEL/RED
PPL
RED
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
RED
RED
RED
RED BLK
27
BLK
WHT = White
BLK W/YEL ENDS BLK W/YEL ENDS
YEL = Yellow 28
LT. = Light
DK. = Dark 29
GRY
BLK
PPL
4 - Direct Injector #1 B A B A B A
5 - Direct Injector #2 B A B A B A B A B A B A A B C D C B A C B A C B A
PNK/ORG
ORG/PNK
PNK/BRN
PNK/RED
BRN/PNK
RED/PNK
A B C
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
WHT/YEL
ORG/WHT
WHT/DK.BLU
DK.BLU/WHT
WHT/RED
RED/WHT
YEL/WHT
WHT/ORG
WHT/PPL
RED/BLU
PPL/WHT
BLK
YEL
BLU/YEL
BLK/GRN
BLK/ORG
LT.BLU/WHT
PPL/YEL
LT.BLU/GRN
BLK/ORG
LT.BLU/BLK
6 - Direct Injector #3
GRY/RED
PPL/YEL
BLK/GRN
LT.BLU/RED
BLU/YEL
7 - Direct Injector #4
8 - Direct Injector #5
9 - Direct Injector #6
10 - Oil Pump
11 - MAP Sensor
12 - T.P.S. #1 (Inner)
13 - T.P.S. #2 (Outer)
14 - Crank Position Sensor
BLK
15 - Air Temperature Sensor
BLK
16 - Water Sensor
BLK/TAN BLK
17 - Shift Switch BLK
LT.BLU/RED
LT.BLU/BLK
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
BRN/WHT
PNK/ORG
WHT/BRN
ORG/PNK
BLK/ORG
PNK/BRN
BRN/PNK
RED/BLU
RED/BLU
PPL/YEL
20 - Digital Diagnostic Terminal Connector GRN/PPL 1 1 PPL
BLK
BLK
YEL
PPL/WHT 2 2 BLU/YEL
21 - Compressor Temperature Sensor PNK/PPL 3 3 LT.BLU/WHT BLK/ORG
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22 - Fuel Pump 20 Ampere Fuse YEL/WHT 4 4 TAN/WHT BLK/ORG
TAN
BLK
TAN 15
PNK/YEL 5 5 TAN/LT.BLU
23 - Injector 20 Ampere Fuse RED/WHT 6 6 TAN/BLK
29
34
GRN/ORG
GRN/BRN
GRN/BLU
GRN/RED
GRN/PPL
GRN/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
PNK/PPL
PPL/PNK
42 30
31
GRY/RED
BLK/GRN TAN/BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
87a
87a
30
85
87
30
30
85
86
87
86
85
87
86
PPL
44 - 60 Ampere Alternator PPL
RED/WHT A
23
GRN/WHT
GRN/WHT
BLK
GRN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLU
RED
RED/PPL
RED/WHT
PPL
YEL/PPL
B
LT.BLU/WHT
LT.BLU/WHT
RED/BLU
45 - Starter 31 32 1 BLK/YEL
46 - Ignition Coil #6 54 53 52
2 PPL
48 - Ignition Coil #4 6
49 - Ignition Coil #3 BLK = Black 7 YEL/RED
YEL/RED
PPL
RED
RED = Red RED
26
RED
TAN = Tan RED RED BLK
WHT = White BLK
27
YEL = Yellow BLK W/YEL ENDS BLK W/YEL ENDS
LT. = Light 28
DK. = Dark 29
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3A – Pulse Crankcase Driven Fuel Pump
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow Caused by
Fuel Pump Pressure @ W.O.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Anti-Siphon Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4
Fuel Pump Pressure @ Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1 Testing Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-5
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3A-1
3A-2
Fuel Pump Removal/Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3A-6
3A-7 3
Fuel Pump Description/Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-3 Reassembly/lnstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7
A
Specifications
Fuel Pump Pressure @ W.O.T.
Maximum – 10 psi
Normal – 8-10 psi
Minimum – 3 psi
Fuel Pump Pressure @ Idle
Normal – 2-3 psi
Minimum – 1 psi
NOTE: Electric fuel pump pressure, if used in conjunction with engine mechanical fuel
pump, must be limited to no more than 4 psi.
Special Tools
1. Fuel Pressure Gauge (0–15 psi) (Obtain Locally)
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
2 2 DIAPHRAGM KIT
3 1 DIAPHRAGM
4 2 RUBBER CHECK VALVE
5 2 RETAINER
6 1 SPRING
7 1 CAP
8 1 SPRING
9 1 CAP
10 1 DIAPHRAGM
11 1 GASKET
12 1 GASKET–boost
13 1 GASKET–pulse
14 1 PLATE
15 2 FITTING
2 SCREW–fuel pump (M5 x 40) 55 6
16
2 SCREW–pump to crankcase (M6 x 50) 55 6
17 1 BASE
18 1 ELBOW (45 Degrees)
19 1 FITTING
20 1 TUBING (6 IN.)
21 5 STA STRAP
22 1 HOSE (W/Insulating Sleeve) (7 in.)(177.8 mm)
23 1 HOSE (W/Insulating Sleeve) (18 in.)(457.2 mm)
24 1 CONNECTOR
25 1 CLAMP
e
c d
57298
a - Fuel hose from tank to fuel pump
b - Fuel hose from fuel pump to Water Separator
c - Pulse hose
d - Mounting screws
e - Fuel pump
Cleaning/Inspection
1. Clean fuel pump housing, check valves, pulse chamber and pump base in solvent and
dry all but check valves with compressed air.
2. Inspect each check valve for splits, chips and for proper sealing against pump hous-
ing.
3. Inspect boost springs for weakness or breakage.
4. Inspect fuel pump housing, pulse chamber and base for cracks or rough gasket sur-
face and replace if any are found.
5. Inspect fitting on fuel pump housing for loosening or any signs of fuel or air leaks. Re-
place or tighten fitting if a leak is found.
Reassembly/lnstallation
ASSEMBLY
1. Insert retainer thru plastic disc and rubber check valve.
c
b
23601
a - Retainer
b - Plastic Disc
c - Rubber Check Valve
3. With retainer installed in pump body, break retainer rod from retainer by bending side-
ways.
23601
a - Rod
b - Retainer Cap
4. Reinstall rod into retainer cap and, use a small hammer or hammer and punch to tap
rod down into retainer until flush with top of retainer.
23601
a - Rod
b - Retainer Cap
5. Place boost spring into pump body and place cap onto boost spring.
50161
a - Boost Spring
b - Pump Body
c - Cap
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3B – Direct Fuel Injection
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-2 Air Temperature Sensor Removal . . . . . . . . . . 3B-25
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-3 Air Temperature Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . 3B-26
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-5 Throttle Plate Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-26
Air Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6
Air Handler Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-8
Throttle Plate Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . 3B-26
Vapor Separator Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-26 3
Vapor Separator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10
Fuel Rails/Air Compressor Hose Routing . . . . . . . 3B-12
Vapor Separator Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-28
Air Plenum Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-29
B
Fuel Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Installation . 3B-29
Air Compressor Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-16 Vapor Separator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-31
DFI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Fuel Rail Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-33
Air Induction Through Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Fuel Rail Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-34
Air Compressor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Fuel Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-37
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Air Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-39
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19 Tracker Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-41
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19 Fuel Rail Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-43
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19 Direct Injector Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-43
Testing Electric Fuel Pump Pressure Output . . . . 3B-20 Fuel Rail and Direct Injector Installation . . . . . 3B-45
Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-20 Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-46
High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . 3B-21 Air Compressor Disassembly/Reassembly . . . 3B-49
Fuel Management Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . 3B-22 Air Compressor Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-50
Reed Block Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-25 Air Compressor Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-51
Reed Block Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-25
Specifications
Fuel System Specifications
Fuel Pressure 89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 kPa)
Air Pressure 79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa)
Fuel/Air Differential 10 psi (68.5 kPa)
High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Amperage 6-9 Amps
Draw
Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Amperage 1-2 Amps
Draw
Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump Output 6-10 psi (41.37 kPa – 68.5 kPa)
Fuel Injector Ohm Resistance 1.8 ± 0.1Ω
Direct Injector Ohm Resistance 1.3 ± 0.3Ω
Special Tools
1. Single Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 160 psi – 91-16850A2
NOTE: To convert 100 psi gauge 91-16850A1 to 160 psi gauge, order upgrade
91-16850--1.
91-16850A2
57416
55295
3. Adaptors to convert pressure gauge 91-852078A1 to an A2
57341
4. Screw (5mm x 25mm) (2 each) – 10-40073-25
56015
7. Seal/Teflon Ring Sizing Tool – 91-851980-1
56014
8. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1
57316
a - Clamp Tool 91-803146T
Notes:
Air Handler
5
96 Loctite Superbonder 454 GEL 6
1
35
2
7
2
9
3
8
96 11
25
27
26
36 10
20
19
B 37
21
28
30
17
32 14
C 33 16 29
34 15 30
12
31
33 A
24
40 38 13
39
17
23
22
A = OIL LINE TO COMPRESSOR 18 17
B = TO FITTING IN FLYWHEEL COVER
C = PRESS INTO TUBING
Air Handler
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 COVER ASSEMBLY
2 2 GROMMET
3 1 AIR FILTER
4 1 COVER
5 1 RIVET
6 1 RETAINER
7 1 GROMMET
8 1 GROMMET (150)
9 1 GROMMET (135)
AIR HANDLER ASSEMBLY
10 1
(See Breakdown on Air Handler Components)
1 SHIM (.020 THICK)
11
1 SHIM (.010 THICK)
12 1 DECAL-Caution-Start in Gear
13 1 BRACKET
14 1 SLEEVE
15 4 SCREW (M6 x 16) 100 11.5
16 1 FUEL PUMP
17 4 CLAMP
18 1 HOSE
19 1 TUBING (18 IN.)
20 1 INSULATING SLEEVE
21 1 ELBOW
22 1 FITTING
23 1 O RING
24 1 GROMMET
25 1 ENCODER
26 1 SCREW (10-24 x 5/8 IN.) Drive Tight
27 1 WASHER
28 2 J CLAMP (Upper Stbd.)
29 1 CLAMP-(Lower)
30 12 SCREW (1/4-20 x 1-1/2 IN.) 175 15 20
31 1 TUBING (5-3/4 IN.)
32 1 CANISTER-Vent
33 3 STA STRAP
34 1 CONNECTOR
35 1 PIN
36 1 DECAL EPA LABEL (1999) (SEE NOTE)
37 1 CABLE TIE (14 IN.)
38 1 CABLE
39 1 WASHER
40 1 WASHER
NOTE: THE EPA LABEL HAS IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON EPA EMISSION REGULATIONS. REPLACE ANY
MISSING OR UNREADABLE EPA LABEL.
1
25 27
5
3
20
19
18
26
15
16
14
24 13
13 17
21
23
6 8
7
22
14 11
16 15 A
9
10
9
9
12
10
19
8
11
9
10 4
20 14
12
9 13
16
15
17
18
4
14
1 18
14
17
14
19 7
11
12 16
9 13
14
20 14
54 26
9
28 20
15
5
8 9 9
29 27
22
6 10 10
24 29 23
54
25
9
90°
20°
30
9
A = TO TELL TALE B = TO STARBOARD FUEL RAIL C = TO FUEL COOLER D = TO TOP OF AIR HANDLER
E = QTY. OF ONE (1) ON EACH SIDE OF COMPRESSOR FLANGE G = TO VAPOR SEPARATOR
Fuel Rails
5
4
5 1
1
2
4 22
22
3
8 10
9 6
7
20
11
21
19
15
18
21
22
17 22 12
5 16 12
13
14
13
4
4
5 5
Fuel Rails
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 2 SCHRADER VALVE KIT (air and fuel)
2 1 FITTING (air inlet)
3 1 FITTING (fuel inlet)
4 4 CLAMP (fitting retainer)
5 10 SCREW M5X8 70 8
6 1 RAIL (starboard) w/out injectors
7 4 SCREW M5X16 70 8
8 1 COVER (tracker valve)
9 1 SPRING (tracker valve)
10 1 DIAPHRAGM (tracker valve)
11 1 O-RING (tracker cover)
12 2 FITTING (air/fuel) starboard
13 2 FITTING (air/fuel) port
14 6 RETAINER (injector) DESIGN II
15 6 RETAINER (injector) DESIGN I
16 6 INJECTOR (fuel)
17 O-RING KIT (large) 6 per kit
18 O-RING KIT (small) 6 per kit
19 2 FITTING
20 1 RAIL (port) w/out injectors
21 O-RING (2 per kit)
22 O-RING fitting/schrader (16 per kit)
14
6
17
26 9
1 14
8
7
9 14
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
19
ÇÇÇ
9
8
ÇÇÇ
14
27 9
11
18 12 15
18
9
10 25
24
11
13 23
21 22
9
14
6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) 6
DFI Operation
rail until an injector opens. A fuel pressure regulator controls pressure in the fuel rails, and
allows excess fuel to return into the vapor separator. The fuel regulator not only regulates
fuel pressure but also regulates it at approximately 10 p.s.i. higher than whatever the air
rail pressure is. The fuel regulator diaphragm is held closed with a spring that requires 10
p.s.i. to force the diaphragm off the diaphragm seat. The back side of the diaphragm is
exposed to air rail pressure. As the air rail pressure increases, the fuel pressure needed
to open the regulator will equally increase. Example: If there is 50 p.s.i. of air pressure on
the air rail side of the diaphragm, 60 p.s.i. of fuel pressure will be required to open the
regulator. The return fuel line to the vapor separator is water cooled.
To equalize the pulses developed by the pumps (both air and fuel) a tracker diaphragm
(3) is installed in the starboard rail. The tracker diaphragm is positioned between the fuel
and air passages. The tracker diaphragm is a rubber diaphragm which expands and re-
tracts depending upon which side of the diaphragm senses the pressure increase (pulse).
Oil
Oil in this engine is not mixed with the fuel before entering the combustion chamber. Oil
is stored inside a standard remote oil reservoir. Crankcase pressure will force oil from the
remote oil reservoir into the oil storage reservoir on the side of the powerhead. Oil will flow
from the oil storage tank into the oil pump. The oil pump is a solenoid design. It is activated
by the ECM and includes 7 pistons with corresponding discharge ports. The oil pump is
mounted directly onto the powerhead. Each cylinder is lubricated by one of the discharge
ports. The oil is discharged into the crankcase. The seventh passage connects to the
hose that leads to the air compressor for lubrication. Excess oil from the compressor re-
turns into the plenum and is ingested through the crankcase.
The ECM will change the discharge rate of the oil pump, depending upon engine demand.
The ECM will also pulse the pump on initial start up to fill the oil passages eliminating the
need to bleed the oil system. The ECM provides additional oil for break in, as determined
by its internal clock. The oil ratio varies with engine rpm and load.
Electrical
The electrical system consists of the ECM, crank position sensor (flywheel speed & crank-
shaft position), throttle position sensor (TPS), MAP sensor, engine temperature sensor,
ignition coils and injectors (fuel & direct). The engine requires a battery to start (i.e. the
ignition and injection will not occur if the battery is dead). The system will run off of the
alternator.
Operation
The operation of the system happens in milliseconds (ms); exact timing is critical for en-
gine performance. As the crankshaft rotates, air is drawn into the crankcase through the
throttle shutters, into the plenum, and through the reed valves. As the piston nears bot-
tom-dead-center, air from the crankcase is forced through the transfer system into the cyl-
inder. As the crankshaft continues to rotate the exhaust and intake ports close. With these
ports closed, fuel can be injected into the cylinder. The ECM will receive a signal from the
throttle position sensor (TPS), engine temperature sensor (TS) and the crank position
sensor (flywheel speed and position sensor). With this information the ECM refers to the
fuel calibration (maps) to determine when to activate (open and close) the injectors and
fire the ignition coils. With the piston in the correct position, the ECM opens the fuel injec-
tor, 90 psi fuel is discharged into a machined cavity inside the air chamber of the air/fuel
rail. This mixes the fuel with the air charge. Next the direct injector will open, discharging
the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The direct injector directs the mixture
at the bowl located in top of the piston. The piston’s bowl directs the air/fuel mixture into
the center of the combustion chamber. This air fuel mixture is then ignited by the spark
plug.
Compressor Notes: To aid in starting when the air rail pressure is low and before the
compressor has time to build pressure, the direct injector is held open by the ECM. This
allows the compression from inside the cylinders to pressurize the air rail faster (1 or 2
strokes, or 600 of crankshaft rotation).
Idle Notes: Idle quality is controlled by fuel volume and fuel timing. The throttle shutters
will be open at idle speeds. The shift cut-out switch will interrupt the fuel to 3 of the cylin-
ders to assist in shifting.
The TPS signals the ECM to change the fuel and spark without movement of the throttle
shutters. The throttle cam is manufactured to allow the TPS sensor shaft to move before
opening the throttle shutters.
The crankshaft position sensor is different from the standard 3.0 liter sensor. The crank
position sensor serves two functions (flywheel speed and position).
b d
91-16850A2
57416
a - Outlet Fuel Hose
b - Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump
c - Fuel Hose (obtain locally)
d - Schrader Valve (22-849606)
56146
bb
aa
a - Starboard Fuel Rail
b - Fuel Pressure Port
2. Place suitable container underneath vapor separator drain plug and remove plug.
3. Disconnect electric fuel pump harness connector.
b
56049
57317
a - Drain Plug
b - Sensor Lead
e
f
g
d
cc
a
56157
57317
a - Harness Connector d - Fuel Inlet Hose
b - Sta-strap e - Fuel Outlet Hose
c - Fuel Hoses f - Fuel Return Hose
g - Mounting Bolts
9. Disconnect throttle cam link rod and the Throttle Position Sensor link rod.
10. Disconnect MAP Sensor hose and compressor oil return hose from air management
assembly.
a
b
ca
b
d
56068
57317
a - Throttle Link Rod
b - Throttle Position Sensor Link Rod
c - MAP Sensor Hose
d - Oil Return Hose
aa ca
d
b
b
56140 56144
a - Oil Hoses
b - Oil Inlet Hose
c - Air Management
d - Bolts (12 each)
aa
aa
aa
56144
a - Screws (2 each)
b - Bolts (3 each)
aa
b
56144
a - Screws
b - Sensor
a aa
bb 56068
a - Bolts
b - Throttle Plate Assembly
a a a b
a
a a
a 57343 57342
a - Screws (7 each)
b - Seal
3. Fuel pump may be removed from cover by wiggling slightly while pulling outward.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT twist pump during removal as wire harness may be dam-
aged.
4. Disconnect harness from pump to separate pump from cover. Inspect filter screen for
debris. Screen may be pried out of pump and cleaned as required.
5. Inspect seal above fuel pump for cuts or abrasions. Replace seal if necessary. Apply
2-4-C w/Teflon to seal lips.
d
bb a
c
56057
56058
a - Filter Screen
b - Harness Connector
c - Pump
d - Seal (Seal shoulder faces OUT)
6. Loosen screw securing float assembly and remove float. Inspect float for deterioration
or fuel retention. Replace float as required.
7. Remove phenolic sealing plate and inspect imbedded neoprene seal on both sides
of plate for cuts or abrasions. Replace plate/seal assembly as required.
ca
b
a
56059
56058
a - Screw
b - Float
c - Plate
d - Seal
aa
cc
dd
f
bb
e ga
ci h
56058 56057
a - Sealing Plate f - Seal (Seal shoulder faces OUT)
b - Float g - Harness
c - Needle h - Filter
d - Pivot Pin i - Fuel Pump
e - Screw [Torque to 10 lb. in. (1.0
N·m)
b b a
b
b
b
b
b 57343 57342
a - Seal
b - Screws [Torque to 30 lb. in. (3.5 Nm)]
6 5
aa
2 1
3 4
7 8
11 12
56144
a - Air Plenum
b - Bolts [Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm)]
2. Secure bracket assembly to vapor separator with 4 screws. Torque screws to 100 lb.
in. (11.5 Nm).
c
a
IMPORTANT: Only use tool 91-803146T (or Snap-On equivalent YA3080) to crimp
full circle clamps. Using a different tool could result in a crimp that is too loose, or
too tight. Do not use screw type metal hose clamp as it may damage hose.
3. Connect fuel hose from bottom of low pressure fuel pump to 90° elbow in bottom of
vapor separator. Secure hose with 16.2 mm full circle clamp (54-855697) using crimp-
ing tool 91-803146T.
a 27291
4. Connect fuel hose from top of low pressure fuel pump to 90° elbow on back side of
vapor separator. Secure hose with 15.3 mm full circle clamp (54-856880) using crimp-
ing tool 91-803146T. (Back view of vapor separator shown below)
57293
57317
a - Mounting Bolts [Torque to 45 lb. in. (5.0 Nm)
b - Fuel Inlet Hose
c - Fuel Outlet Hose
d - Fuel Return Hose
e - Low Pressure Electric Fuel Pump (6 - 9 psi)
f - Inlet Fuel Hose to Low Pressure Pump
57317
a - Sensor Lead
cc
aa
d
bb
56157
a - Electric Fuel Pump Harness Connector
b - Sta-Strap
c - Top Fuel Hose (Fuel return from fuel cooler)
d - Bottom Fuel Hose (Inlet from low pressure pump)
db
bb
ca
ec
aa 56118
a - Port Fuel Rail e - Harness Connector
b - Air Pressure Port f - Fuel Pressure Port
c - Spring Clip g - Starboard Fuel Rail
d - Fuel Injector
NOTE: Always remove fuel/air hose and fitting together by removing fitting retainer rather
cutting clamps.
3. Remove fuel inlet hose, fuel outlet hose and air hose from fuel rail.
aa
cc
bb
fc
56140
NOTE: It is recommended that direct injectors remain in the cylinder head (if they are not
to be replaced) while removing the fuel rail. The direct injectors have a teflon seal which
may expand if the injector is removed from the head. This expansion may cause rein-
stallation difficulty or require the replacement of the seal.
4. Remove 2 nuts securing fuel rail.
5. As fuel rail is removed, use a flat tip screw driver to hold direct injectors in cylinder
head.
bb
aa
bb
56121
a - Fuel Rail
b - Direct Injectors
Fuel Rail Disassembly
The starboard fuel rail contains 3 fuel injectors and a tracker valve.
The port fuel rail contains 3 fuel injectors, 1 fuel fuel regulator and 1 air regulator.
NOTE: Each fuel/air inlet or outlet hose adaptor has 2 O-ring seals. These O-rings should
be inspected for cuts or abrasions and replaced as required when fuel rail is disassembled
for cleaning.
e aa a e
aa
bb dd
cc a
aa a
f
f
56122
a - Fuel Injector d - Tracker Valve
b - Fuel Regulator e - Fuel/Air Inlet (hidden)
c - Air Regulator f - Fuel/Air Outlet
aa
56125
57418
a - Screws
b - Pry Holes
3. Inspect fuel injector orifices for foreign debris; O-rings for cuts or abrasions and plastic
components for heat damage. Replace components as required.
4. An ohm test of the fuel injector may be made by connecting test leads to injector termi-
nals. Ohm reading should be 1.8 ± 0.1 ohm.
OHMS60 4030 20 15 10
100 5
200
20 0
10 10 1530
5 40
0 20
VOLTS
0 2 4 6 8
DC AMPS0 10
aa
DCV ACV
cc DVA
X1
bb
56124
56002
a - Fuel Injector
b - Fuel Nozzle
c - O-Rings
a
56125
a - Injector
b - Retainer
c - Screws [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm)]
12
12 ÇÇ ÇÇ 77
66 12
ÇÇ ÇÇ 77
66
11
11 11
11
88 88
10
10 10
10
99 99
The fuel pump is capable of delivering more fuel than the engine can consume. Excess
fuel flows through the fuel pressure regulator, interconnecting passages/hoses, fuel cool-
er, and back to the vapor separator tank. This constant flow of fuel means that the fuel
system is always supplied with cool fuel, thereby preventing the formation of fuel vapor
bubbles and minimizing the chances of vapor lock.
The fuel pressure regulator is calibrated to raise the fuel pressure to 10 psi above the air
pressure.
The fuel regulator is mounted on the port fuel rail, near the top. This regulator relies on
both air and spring pressure to control the fuel pressure. Inside the regulator assembly
is a 10 lb. spring, this spring holds the diaphragm against the diaphragm seat. The contact
between the diaphragm and diaphragm seat closes the passage between the incoming
fuel (from the electric fuel pump) and the fuel return passage.
When the engine is not running (no air pressure on the spring side of the diaphragm) the
fuel pressure required to move the diaphragm is 10 psi.
When the engine is running, air pressure from the air compressor (80 psi) is routed
through the air passages, to the spring side of the fuel pressure regulator diaphragm.
The air pressure (80 psi) and spring pressure (10 psi) combine to regulate system fuel
pressure to 90 psi - or 10 psi higher than the air pressure in the DFI system fuel/air rails.
bb
56126 56127
a - Screws
b - Fuel Regulator
c - Diaphragm
d - Spring
e - Cup
f - O-Ring
FUEL REGULATOR INSTALLATION
NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to diaphragm surface and O-ring to aid in the
retention of diaphragm and O-ring on fuel rail during reassembly.
1. Position diaphragm on fuel rail.
2. Position O-ring on fuel rail.
3. Position spring and cup onto diaphragm.
NOTE: Apply anti-seize grease (obtain locally) or 2-4-C w/Teflon to regulator attaching
screw threads.
4. Place cover over spring/cup/diaphragm assembly and secure with 4 screws. Torque
screws to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm).
bb a
ea e
a
cc
dd
56126
56128
a - Diaphragm
b - O-Ring
c - Spring
d - Cup
e - Screws [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm)]
33 3
3
12
12 12
12
44 44
55 5
5
ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
11
11
ÇÇ ÇÇ 66
11
11
66
10
10 10
10
77 77
9
9 9
88 8
8
The air pressure regulator is designed to limit the air pressure inside the rails to
approximately 80 psi.
The air regulator uses a spring (pressure) to control the air pressure. This spring (80
psi) holds the diaphragm against the diaphragm seat. The contact area blocks
(closes) the air inlet passage from the excess air, return passage. As the air pressure
rises (below the diaphragm), it must reach a pressure equal to or greater than the
spring pressure holding the diaphragm closed. Once this pressure is achieved, the
spring compresses, allowing the diaphragm to move. The diaphragm moves away
from the diaphragm seat, allowing air to exit through the diaphragm seat, into the ex-
cess air passage leading to the exhaust adaptor plate.
ca
db
a aa
ec
b 56130
56129
a - Screws
b - Air Regulator
c - Diaphragm
d - Spring
e - Cup
da
c
56131 56132
a - Cup
b - Spring
c - Diaphragm
d - Cover
e - Screws (5mm x 25mm) (10-40073 25)
f - Flat Washers (12-30164)
Tracker Valve
Engine Off (No Pressure) Engine at Operating Pressures
11 11
22 33 22
33
44 99 44
99
55 55
88 88
66 66
77 7
The tracker is located on the starboard fuel/air rail assembly. The DFI system must main-
tain a constant 10 psi pressure difference between the fuel pressure and air pressure in
the rails, at all times. The tracker is designed to maintain the 10 psi differential when the
air or fuel pressure suddenly raises (i.e. pulses generated by the compressor’s piston or
by the fuel injectors opening and closing). The tracker contains a spring on the air side
of the diaphragm. This spring positions the diaphragm against the diaphragm’s seat
(when the engine is not running).
After the engine starts, and the fuel and air pressure reach normal operating range, the
fuel pressure will compress the spring and the diaphragm will move slightly away from the
seat (to a neutral position). At this point the pressure on both sides of the tracker dia-
phragm is equal (10 psi spring pressure + 80 psi air pressure = 90 psi fuel pressure).
Any air or fuel pressure “spikes” on one side of the diaphragm will transfer this pressure
rise to the other system (air or fuel) on the other side of the diaphragm. Both systems will
have a momentary increase in pressure so that the 10 psi difference between air and fuel
system pressures can be maintained.
NOTE: To prevent excessive wear in the seat, the tracker is calibrated to allow the dia-
phragm to be slightly away from the seat during normal operation.
dc
aa
ba
c
b
aa 56135
56136
a - Screws
b - Diaphragm
c - Spring
d - O-ring
a
d
aa
eb 56135
56137
a - Diaphragm
b - Spring
c - O-ring
d - Cover
e - Screws [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm)]
aa
cc
bb
fc
56140
bb aa
56138
a - Direct Injector (3 each cylinder head)
b - Harness Connector
3. Inspect injector teflon sealing ring (white) for signs of combustion blowby (teflon ring
will be streaked brownish black). If blowby is present, replace teflon sealing ring. If
blowby is not present, sealing ring may be reused.
4. Inspect O-rings and cork gasket for cuts or abrasions. Replace components as re-
quired.
5. If teflon seal requires replacement, use teflon ring installation tool 91-851980 to slide
new seal onto injector. Following installation of teflon ring, the teflon ring sizing tool
(91-851980-1) can be used to compress the teflon seal to aid in the installation of the
injector into the cylinder head.
c d e e
b a
f
91-851980-1
6. An ohm test of the direct injector may be made by connecting test leads to injector
terminals. Ohm reading should be 1.3 ± 0.3 ohm.
7. Carbon buildup on tip of direct injector may be removed by use of a brass wire hand
brush.
OHMS 60 40 30 20 15 10
100 5
a
b
200
20 0
10 30
10
5 15
0 40
VOLTS 0 4 6 8 20
2
DC AMPS 0 10
DCV ACV
X1
DVA
c
b
56017
a 56003
a - Direct Injector
b - Direct Injector
c - Tip
NOTE: If cylinder head is going to be replaced, remove cup washers from each direct in-
jector port by prying out with a flat tip screwdriver. Reinstall washers with retainers into
new cylinder head. Washers provide tension between direct injectors, cylinder head and
fuel rails.
bb
aa
56148
a - Cup Washer
b - Retainer
bb bb
aa
a
aa
aa
56141
a - Nuts [Torque to 33 lb.ft. (44 Nm)]
b - Direct Injector Harness Connectors
Air Compressor
Air compressor is a single cylinder, water cooled and lubricated by the outboard oil pump.
COMPRESSOR REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cables from battery terminals.
2. Remove top cowling.
IMPORTANT: Prior to removing flywheel cover, remove vent hose from fitting on
flywheel cover.
3. Remove flywheel cover.
4. Use 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) drive on belt tensioner arm to relieve belt tension. Remove belt.
bb
aa
56142
a - Belt Tensioner
b - 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) drive
CAUTION
If engine has been recently run, air pressure outlet hose fittings may be extremely
hot. Allow components to cool off before beginning disassembly.
5. Disconnect air pressure outlet hose.
b
aa
56149
a - Air Pressure Outlet Hose
b - Water outlet Hose (tell-tale)
b cc 56147
a - Air Compressor Oil Inlet Hose
b - Water Inlet Hose
c - Excess Oil Return Hose
10. Remove 4 bolts securing air compressor to outboard and remove compressor.
b
c
14
d
14
14
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
f
14
ÇÇÇ g
9
9 e
oo jj
j
kk
t
jj m j
pp
ss
j j
r ll l
56150
q
a - Air Inlet m - Tracker Valve
b - Air Filter n - Fuel Inlet
c - Compressor Air Inlet w/Inlet Restrictor o - Fuel Regulator [89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8
d - Air Compressor kPa)]
e - Compressor Air Outlet p - Air Regulator [79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa)]
f - Compressor Water Inlet q - Air [79 ± 2 psi (544.0 ± 13.8 kPa)]
g - Excess Oil Return r - Excess Air Return to Exhaust Adaptor Plate
h - Compressor Oil Inlet s - Port Fuel Rail
i - Fuel System Pressure Test Valve t - Excess Fuel Return to Fuel Cooler
j - Fuel Injector u - Air Pressure Test Valve
k - Starboard Fuel Rail v - High Pressure
l - High Pressure Fuel [89 ± 2 psi (613.5 ± 13.8 w - Low Pressure
kPa)]
a
bb
cc
d
d
56146
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3C – Oil Injection
Table of Contents
Oil System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-1 Priming the Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-12
Oil Pump Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-1 Priming Procedure – Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-13
Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-2 Remote Oil Hose Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-14
Oil Hose Check Valve Installation on 1998 Model
135/150 DFI Outboards SN 0G886266 and
Filling the Oil Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir
3C-14
3
Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-3
Oil Injection Hose Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-9
and Remote Oil Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Warning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3C-15
3C-15
C
Oil Pump Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . 3C-10 Oil System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-16
Engine Oil Reservoir Removal and Installation 3C-11 Low Oil Warning System is Activated . . . . . . 3C-16
Oil System
f
h
g
b
e
c
a
Oil Hose Check Valve Installation on 1998 Model 135/150 DFI Outboards
SN 0G886266 and Below
To prevent possible momentary oil starvation in the oil pump delivery hoses, it is recom-
mended that check valve kit 21-858945A2 be installed as follows:
NOTE: Refer to Service Bulletin 98-23.
1. Remove flywheel cover. Pull out vent hose.
a - Vent Hose
2. Remove 4 bolts securing bottom cowl halves and remove bottom cowling.
52352
a
55932 55970 a
a - Bolt
a - Throttle Cable
4. Remove 3 bolts securing oil reservoir and lay reservoir off to one side.
a
b
a - Bolts
b - Oil Reservoir
5. Remove throttle link arm and bolt securing throttle arm. Remove throttle arm.
NOTE: It is recommended that a razor knife be used to make a small slit in the oil hoses
to aid in removal. Removing hoses without cutting them may result in the breakage of the
oil fitting. Trim cut portion off of oil hose before reinstalling hose.
8. Remove oil hoses from fittings on #2, #4, and #6 cylinders.
NOTE: All check valve/hose assemblies for cylinders 2, 4, 6 are brass colored and have
1.250 (31.75 mm) long hoses attached to check valve.
IMPORTANT: Due to the close proximity of the #2 cylinder oil hose to the flywheel,
it will be necessary to trim the length of the #2 oil hose to provide adequate clear-
ance between the oil hose and the flywheel when the check valve assembly is
installed.
9. Trim off #2 cylinder oil hose to an appropriate length (to provide clearance between
hose and flywheel) and install new check valve/hose assembly. Secure hose connec-
tions with sta-straps.
10. Install new check valve/hose assemblies on cylinders #4 and #6. Secure all hose con-
nections with sta-straps.
d a
d b
d
c
57410
11. Reinstall throttle control arm. Connect throttle link to throttle cam. Torque bolt to 20
lb. ft. (27 Nm).
12. Reinstall oil reservoir. Torque bolts to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm).
13. Reinstall alternator. Torque bolt to 40 lb. ft. (54 Nm).
57409
18. Install new check valve/hose assemblies on cylinders #1, #3 and #5. Secure all hose
connections with sta-straps.
57411
19. Reinstall starter motor. Torque bolts to 17.5 lb ft. (23.5 Nm).
20. Reinstall starter solenoid/trim relay plate. Torque bolts to 150 lb. in. (17 Nm).
21. Reinstall ECM. Torque bolts to 70 lb. in. (8 Nm).
c c
b
b
57412
c
Cyl #1
d
Cyl #2
3 d
Cyl #3 5
Cyl #4
d
2 d d
Cyl #5
6
Cyl #6
Cyl a
#5
1 d
Cyl b 7
Cyl #1
#3 Cyl
#2
Cyl
Cyl #4
#6
Cyl. #1 0.078 in. (1.98 mm) I.D. Check Valve Oil Hose Sizes
with 3.125 in. (79.4 mm) length Hose Hose Inside Diameter Length ± 0.20
Cyl. #3 0.078 in. (1.98 mm) I.D. Check Valve ± .01 (0.25mm) (5.1 mm)
with 3.125 in. (79.4 mm) length Hose
Cyl. #5 0.078 in. (1.98 mm) I.D. Check Valve
with 3.125 in. (79.4 mm) length Hose
1 0.125 (3.2 mm) 16 in. (406 mm)
Cyl. #2 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) I.D. Check Valve
with 1.250 in. (31.7 mm) length Hose 2 0.125 (3.2 mm) 20 in. (508 mm)
Cyl. #4 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) I.D. Check Valve 3 0.125 (3.2 mm) 16 in. (406 mm)
with 1.250 in. (31.7 mm) length Hose 4 0.092 (2.3 mm) 28 in. (711 mm)
Cyl. #6 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) I.D. Check Valve 5 0.092 (2.3 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)
with 1.250 in. (31.7 mm) length Hose
6 0.092 (2.3 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)
Note All check valve I.D. measurements
given are ± 0.002 in. (0.050 mm) 7 0.092 (2.3 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)
a c
b
e
h f g
a - Oil Pump
b - Gasket
c - Bracket
d - Bushing (3)
e - Rubber Grommet (3) – Insert into Hole
f - Washer (3)
g - Bolt (3) – Torque to 16 lb. ft. (21.5 Nm)
h - Sta-Straps – Fasten All Hose Ends
INSTALLATION
1. Install pump as shown.
2. Reconnect the oil hoses. Refer to Oil Injection Hose Installation for correct location.
Fasten hoses to pump fittings with sta-straps.
3. Connect the wiring harness.
NOTE: Replacement oil pump may have 2 pin electrical connection vs. 4 pin with original
oil pump. The 2 pin connection will still function with the existing wire harness.
4. Refill the oil system. Refer to Priming the Oil Pump.
f
e
g
d
c
a
j
b
h
d g e g
i
a - Oil Reservoir
b - Fuel Cooler (Design 1)
c - Bolt (1) – Torque to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm)
d - Washer (3)
e - Rubber Grommet (3) – Insert into Holes
f - Low Oil Switch
g - Bushing (3)
h - Grommet (2) – Insert into Hole
i - Bolt (2) – Torque to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm)
j - Sta-Straps – Fasten All Hose Ends
k - Fuel Cooler (Design 2)
INSTALLATION
1. Install oil reservoir as shown.
2. Fasten the oil hoses with sta-straps.
3. Connect the LIGHT BLUE wire leads.
4. Refill the oil system. Refer to Priming the Oil Pump.
b
a - Oil Injection Pump
b - Oil Supply Hose
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the fuel pumps, fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Other-
wise the fuel pumps will run without fuel during the priming process.
NOTE: It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process.
a
a - Oil Hose Without Blue Stripe
a - Fill Cap
b - Engine Oil Reservoir
c - Fill Cap
Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir and Remote Oil Hose
NOTE: Before starting engine, make sure the oil pump has been primed.
1. Start the engine. Run the engine until all the air has been vented out of the reservoir
and oil starts to flow out of the reservoir. Re-tighten fill cap.
a
a - Fill Cap
No Continuity
Blue wire is shorted to ground
Continuity
Remove screw and pull out Continuity
the oil float switch from the
Check continuity with engine run-
tank. Check switch again for ning and electrical system under
continuity load. Refer to Service Bulletin 98-3
Continuity No Continuity
Oil Float switch is faulty. Re- Float in oil tank is faulty. Re-
place switch place oil tank
FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3D – Emissions
Table of Contents
Exhaust Emissions Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Emissions Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4
What Are Emissions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Manufacturer’s Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4
Hydrocarbons – HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Dealer Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5
Carbon Monoxide – CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1
Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Owner Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5
EPA Emission Regulations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5 3
Controlling Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Decal Location: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Replacement of Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
D
Outboard Hydrocarbon Emissions Reductions . . . 3D-2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Stratified vs Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Date Code Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Stratified Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4
100
80
60
40
20
0
96 97 98 99 2000 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Stratified Charge
A stratified charge engine only pulls air through the transfer system. The fuel required for
combustion is forced into the cylinder through an injector placed in the top of the cylinder
(head). The injector sprays a fuel/air mixture in the form of a bubble into the cylinder. Sur-
rounding this bubble is air supplied by the transfer system. As the bubble is ignited and
burns, the surrounding air provides almost complete combustion before the exhaust port
opens.
A stratified charge is hard to ignite. The fuel/air bubble is not evenly mixed at 14.7:1 and
is not easily ignited.
Emissions Information
Manufacturer’s Responsibility:
Beginning with 1998 model year engines, manufacturers of all marine propulsion engines
must determine the exhaust emission levels for each engine horsepower family and certi-
fy these engines with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). A certifi-
cation decal/emissions control information label, showing emission levels and engine
specifications directly related to emissions, must be placed on each engine at the time
of manufacture.
Dealer Responsibility:
When performing service on all 1998 and later outboards that carry a certification, atten-
tion must be given to any adjustments that are made that affect emission levels.
Adjustments must be kept within published factory specifications.
Replacement or repair of any emission related component must be executed in a manner
that maintains emission levels within the prescribed certification standards.
Dealers are not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horsepower or
allow emission levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Exceptions include manufacturers prescribed changes, such as that for altitude adjust-
ments. Also included would be factory authorized:
• Installation of performance style gear housings by Mercury Marine.
• Service replacement parts modified, changed or superceded by Mercury Marine.
Owner Responsibility:
The owner/operator is required to have engine maintenance performed to maintain emis-
sion levels within prescribed certification standards.
The owner/operator is not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horse-
power or allow emissions levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Single engine exceptions may be allowed with permission from the EPA for racing and
testing.
EPA Emission Regulations:
All new 1998 and later outboards manufactured by Mercury Marine are certified to the
United States Environmental Protection Agency as conforming to the requirements of the
regulations for the control of air pollution from new outboard motors. This certification is
contingent on certain adjustments being set to factory standards. For this reason, the fac-
tory procedure for servicing the product must be strictly followed and, whenever practica-
ble, returned to the original intent of the design.
The responsibilities listed above are general and in no way a complete listing of the rules
and regulations pertaining to the EPA laws on exhaust emissions for marine products. For
more detailed information on this subject, you may contact the following locations:
VIA U.S. POSTAL SERVICE:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
401 M St. NW
Washington, DC 20460
VIA EXPRESS or COURIER MAIL:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
501 3rd St. NW
Washington, DC 20001
EPA INTERNET WEB SITE:
http:/www.epa.gov/omswww
CERTIFICATION LABEL:
The certification label must be placed on each engine at the time of manufacture and must
be replaced in the same location if damaged or removed. Shown below is a typical certifi-
cation label and is not representative of any one model. Label shown below is not to scale;
(shown at twice the normal size).
a b
Emission Control 2508 c
1998
Information cc PART # 37–855211 27
This engine conforms to 1998 Model Year Idle Speed (in gear): 550 RPM d
U.S. EPA regulations for marine SI engines.
Refer to Owners Manual Timing: Not Adjustable ECM
for required maintenance Controlled e
k Spark Plug: Champion PZFR5F-11
Family: WM9XM03.0220
Gap: .040” f
135 HP DFI h
i
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Decal Location:
Model Production Part No. Service Part No. Location on Engine
1998 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 37-855211 26 37-855577 26 Intake Plenum STBD
DFI (135 – 150 H.P.) Side or Flywheel Cover
1999 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 37-856984 13 37-856985 13 Intake Plenum STBD
DFI (135 – 150 H.P.) Side or Vapor Separator
135 HP DFI
b JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
a
a - “V” Notch
b - Month of Manufacture
Installation
Install the label on a clean surface in the original factory location.
POWERHEAD
Section 4A
Table of Contents
Powerhead Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1 Crankshaft (and End Cap) Bearings . . . . . . . . 4A-31
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1 Reed Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-32
Powerhead Repair Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3 End Bearing Bleed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-33
Cylinder Block and End Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4 Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-33
Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6 Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-35
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-8 Powerhead Reassembly and Installation . . . . . . . 4A-36
Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods . . . . . . 4A-10 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-36
Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-11 Crankshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-40
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-13
Powerhead Removal from Driveshaft Housing . . 4A-13
Piston and Connecting Rod Reassembly . . . . 4A-42
Piston and Piston Ring Combinations . . . . . . . 4A-43
4
Powerhead Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-17 Piston Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-44 A
Water Pressure Relief Valve Components . . . 4A-25 Crankcase Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-46
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-25 Assembly of Reed Blocks to Intake Manifold . 4A-48
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-26 Assembly of Exhaust Divider Plate to Block . . 4A-48
Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover . . . . . . . 4A-26 Reinstalling Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-51
Special Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-26 Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-52
Cylinder Bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-27 Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-53
Pistons and Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-28 Powerhead Installation on Driveshaft Housing . . 4A-54
Cylinder Heads and Exhaust Divider Plate . . . 4A-30 Break-ln Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-58
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-30
Powerhead Specifications
Special Tools
1. Lifting Eye 91-90455
10. Piston Ring Compressor for 2.5 Litre (153 cu. in.) 91-818773
2 o’clock
CRANK HEAD
6 2
5 1
4 3
7 10
10
D 7
18
17
16
15 23
14 22
18 13 21
12 11 19 20
95
46
44 45
51
24
42 47
8 9
10
10 43
A
26
40
39
41 33
9
30
25
35
B 31 7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
34 37 9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)
32
36 38 51 Loctite 222 (92-809818)
27
62 Permabond 105 Cyanacrylate Adhesive
10 62
(Purchase Locally)
C 29 28 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
A = TO FUEL COOLER WATER IN B = TO FUEL COOLER WATER OUT FITTING
C = TO LOWER PORT FUEL RAIL SIDE FITTING
D = TO AIR COMPRESSOR LOWER WATER INLET FITTING
Cylinder Head
Water Fitting Orientation
Looking Down at Top of Block
10 9
12
15°
13
13 Back of Engine
11 13 14
9 13 3
8
A 1
9
6 4
5 7
2
14
16 15
6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1)
9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24)
A = TO STRAIGHT FITTING ON BACK OF EXHAUST PLATE
Cylinder Head
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 CYLINDER HEAD (PORT)
1
1 CYLINDER HEAD (STARBOARD)
2 2 GASKET
30 lb-ft
3 24 BOLT (2 IN.) (40.7 N·m) then
tighten additional 90°
4 4 DOWEL PIN
5 2 GASKET
6 2 COVER
7 2 THERMOSTAT (143 degrees)
8 4 SCREW (M6 x 25) 200 16.5 22.5
9 1 ELBOW (STARBOARD)
10 1 ELBOW (PORT)
11 1 HOSE (21-1/2 IN.)
12 1 HOSE (11-1/2 IN.)
13 5 STA-STRAP
14 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR (STARBOARD)
15 1 RETAINER
16 1 SCREW (M8 x 12) 200 16.5 22.5
14
11 95 12
9
10
16 95
14
14
95
12
13
8
7 95
95 8
15
95
14 6
1
3
4
95
5
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24)
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12)
Torque Sequence
CRANKCASE COVER BOLTS (AND TORQUE SEQUENCE)
8 7
a 4
1
3 2
b
5 6
a - Add light oil to threads and bolt face: 8 Bolts (3/8 in. - 16 in.)
38 lb. ft. (51.5 N·m)
b - Bolts (5/16 in. - 18) 180 lb. in. (20 N·m)
EXHAUST DIVIDER PLATE BOLTS 200 lb. in. (22.5 N·m) Apply Loctite 271 to threads
19 18
10 15
13 14
6
5
3
1
2
4
7
8
11
12
16 17 56167
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS
Add light oil to threads and bolt face: 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m) then turn an additional
90°.
10 9
6 5
2 1
3 4
7 8
11 12 56168
6
5
2 1
3 4
7 8
56160
11 12
General Information
Powerhead “Disassembly” and “Reassembly” instructions are printed in a sequence that
should be followed to assure best results when removing or replacing powerhead compo-
nents. If complete disassembly is not necessary, start reassembly at point disassembly
was stopped. (Refer to “Table of Contents,” preceding.) Usually, complete disassembly
of powerhead will be required.
If major powerhead repairs are to be performed, remove powerhead from drive shaft
housing. Removal of powerhead is not required for 1) inspection of cylinder walls and pis-
tons (refer to “Powerhead Removal and Disassembly,” following, and remove cylinder
heads and exhaust cover), 2) minor repairs on components, such as ignition system, fuel
injection, reed blocks and cylinder heads and checking operation of thermostats.
b
52188
a - Screws
b - Retainer
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
GRN/WHT GRN/WHT a
TAN
BRN/WHT
56141
a - Tell-tale Hose
8. Disconnect warning gauge harness.
1 6
2 3 45
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
a - TAN/BLACK
b - TAN/WHITE
c - PINK/LT. BLUE to PINK/LT. BLUE
d - ORANGE
e - Sta-Straps
9. Remove BLUE and GREEN trim harness leads from trim solenoids.
a
a - Trim Solenoids
b
d
a - Throttle Cable
b - Shift Cable
c - Hose Clamp
d - Fuel Line
14. Remove 4 bolts securing bottom cowl halves and remove bottom cowling.
52352
a
55932 55970 a
a - Bolt
15. Remove fuel cooler inlet and outlet water hoses from fittings on exhaust adaptor plate
and poppet valve cover. Remove excess air hose (from port fuel rail) from fitting on
exhaust adaptor plate.
16. Remove thermostat cover hose from exhaust adaptor plate.
b
d 56158
c 56159
a - Fuel Cooler Outlet Water Hose
b - Fuel Cooler Inlet Water Hose
c - Air Hose
d - Thermostat Cover Hose
17. Remove 10 nuts and washers (five each side) from powerhead base.
18. Remove plastic cap from center of flywheel and install LIFTING EYE (91-90455) into
flywheel at least five full turns. Using a hoist, lift powerhead assembly from driveshaft
housing.
a a a
a
a
51846
56162
a - Nuts and Washers (5 Each Side)
b - Lifting Eye
Powerhead Disassembly
1. Place powerhead in repair stand or on a bench.
2. Remove thermostat covers, thermostats and gaskets.
3. Remove cylinder heads from engine block.
b c
e d
56163 f 56165
a - Thermostat Cover
b - Thermostat
c - Gasket
d - Cylinder Head
e - Gasket
f - Engine Block
b
a
56166
a - Exhaust Manifold Cover
b - Seal
c - Gasket
d - Reed Block/Adaptor Plate Assembly
56169
7. Remove bolts from end caps.
51854
a - Crankcase Attaching End Cap Bolts
51849
a - Crankcase Attaching End Cap Bolts
b a
a
51845
a - Pry Points
b - Crankcase Cover
51848
1. Use Powerhead Stand (91-30591A1) for rotating crankshaft to desired position for re-
moval of connecting rods.
2. Using an awl or electric pencil, scribe the cylinder identification number on each con-
necting rod as shown. Reassemble connecting rods in same cylinder.
Ä
Ä
51849
3. Use a 5/16 in. 12 point socket to remove connecting rod bolts, then remove rod cap,
roller bearings and bearing cage from connecting rod.
a
51850
a - Connecting Rod Bolts
CAUTION
Each connecting rod and end cap are a matched machined set and must never
be mismatched.
6. Inspect pistons as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” following.
7. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) to remove piston rings. Always install new pis-
ton rings.
56155
56153
8. Using an awl, scribe identification number of connecting rod on inside of piston (a).
Reassemble piston on same connecting rod.
9. Using tool (91-52952A1), remove piston pin lockrings from both ends of piston pin.
Never re-use piston pin lockrings.
a
b
51083
56154
IMPORTANT: Warming the piston dome using a torch lamp will ease removal and
installation of piston pin.
10. Support piston and tap out piston pin using service tool (91-76159A1) as shown.
11. Remove piston pin needle bearings (29 per piston) and locating washers (2 per pis-
ton) as shown.
IMPORTANT: We recommend that you use new needle bearings at reassembly for
lasting repair. However, if needle bearings must be re-used, keep each set of bear-
ings identified for reassembly on same connecting rod.
b
a
c
51853
51088
a - Piston Pin
b - Piston Pin Tool (91-76159A1)
c - Needle Bearing Locating Washers
12. Remove upper end cap and lower end cap from crankshaft.
13. Remove and discard O-ring seals from each end cap.
14. Remove oil seal(s) from end of each end cap by driving seal out with a punch and ham-
mer.
15. Inspect roller bearing in upper end cap as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection”.
NOTE: If roller bearing is damaged, replace upper end cap and roller bearings as an
assembly.
b a
51848 c
51853
a - Upper End Cap
b - Lower End Cap
c - O-Ring
d - Seal
CAUTION
Safety glasses should be worn when removing or installing crankshaft sealing
rings.
17. Remove retaining ring as shown.
51850
a - Sealing Rings
b - Retaining Ring
18. Remove bearing race halves and roller bearings from crankshaft.
IMPORTANT: Keep same bearing races and roller bearings together.
51850
a - Bearing Race Halves
b - Roller Bearings
a b
51854
a - Crankshaft Ball Bearing
b - Pliers
c - Retaining Ring
b
c
51081
a - Press
b - Powerhead Stand (91-30591A1)
c - Crankshaft Ball Bearing
d - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
12
11
10
13
9
3
4
6
5
7
3 8
1
2
a
50803
1 - Cover
2 - Bolt
3 - Gasket
4 - Relief Valve Plate
5 - Diaphragm
6 - Water Deflector
7 - Washer
8 - Screw
9 - Spring
10 - Poppet Valve
11 - Grommet
12 - Carrier
13 - Washer
Torque Specifications
a 150 lb. in. (17 N·m)
CAUTION
If crankcase cover or cylinder block is to be submerged in a very strong cleaning
solution, it will be necessary to remove the crankcase cover/cylinder block bleed
system from crankcase cover/cylinder block to prevent damage to hoses and
check valves.
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block and crankcase cover. Be sure that all sealant and old
gaskets are removed from matching surfaces. Be sure that carbon deposits are re-
moved from exhaust ports.
2. Inspect cylinder block and crankcase cover for cracks or fractures.
3. Check gasket surfaces for nicks, deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause
compression leakages.
4. Check all water and oil passages in cylinder block and crankcase cover to be sure that
they are not obstructed and that plugs are in place and tight.
Special Service Information
Grooves in Cylinder Block Caused By Crankshaft Sealing Rings
Grooves in cylinder block caused by crankshaft sealing rings are not a problem, except
if installing a new crankshaft and the new sealing rings on crankshaft do not line up with
existing grooves in cylinder block. If installing a new crankshaft, refer to crankshaft instal-
lation, Powerhead Reassembly section to determine if powerhead can be used.
Cylinder Bores
1. Inspect cylinder bores for scoring, scuffing or a transfer of aluminum from piston to
cylinder wall. Scoring or scuffing, if NOT TOO SEVERE, can normally be removed by
honing. If a transfer of aluminum has occurred, an acidic solution such as “TIDY
BOWL CLEANER” should be applied to the areas of the cylinder bore where transfer
of aluminum has occurred. After the acidic solution has removed the transferred alu-
minum, thoroughly flush the cylinder bore(s) to remove any remaining acid. Cylinder
walls may now be honed to remove any glaze and to aid in the seating of new piston
rings.
HONING PROCEDURE
a. When cylinders are to be honed, follow the hone manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions for use of the hone and cleaning and lubrication during honing.
b. For best results, a continuous flow of honing oil should be pumped into the work
area. If pumping oil is not practical, use an oil can. Apply oil generously and fre-
quently on both stones and work area.
CAUTION
When honing cylinder block, remove hone frequently and check condition of cyl-
inder walls. DO NOT hone any more than absolutely necessary, as hone can re-
move cylinder wall material rapidly.
c. Start stroking at smallest diameter. Maintain firm stone pressure against cylinder
wall to assure fast stock removal and accurate results.
d. Localize stroking in the smallest diameter until drill speed is constant throughout
length of bore. Expand stones, as necessary, to compensate for stock removal
and stone wear. Stroke at a rate of 30 complete cycles per minute to produce best
cross-hatch pattern. Use honing oil generously.
e. Thoroughly clean cylinder bores with hot water and detergent. Scrub well with a
stiff bristle brush and rinse thoroughly with hot water. A good cleaning is essential.
If any of the abrasive material is allowed to remain in the cylinder bore, it will cause
rapid wear of new piston rings and cylinder bore in addition to bearings. After
cleaning, bores should be swabbed several times with engine oil and a clean
cloth, then wiped with a clean, dry cloth. Cylinders should not be cleaned with
kerosene or gasoline. Clean remainder of cylinder block to remove excess materi-
al spread during honing operation.
2. Hone all cylinder walls just enough to de-glaze walls.
3. Measure cylinder bore diameter (with a snap gauge micrometer) of each cylinder, as
shown below. Check for tapered, out-of-round (egg-shaped) and oversize bore.
51846
135/150 Models
Models Cylinder Block Finish Hone
Standard Piston Bore 3.501 in. (88.93mm)
.015 in. (0.381mm) Oversize Piston Bore 3.516 in. (89.31mm)
4. If a cylinder bore is tapered, out-of-round or worn more than 0.003 in. (0.076mm) from
standard “Cylinder Block Finish Hone” diameter (refer to chart, preceding), it will be
necessary to re-bore that cylinder(s) to 0.015 in. (0.381mm) oversize or re-sleeve and
install oversize piston(s) and piston rings during reassembly.
NOTE: The weight of an oversize piston is approximately the same as a standard size
piston; therefore, it is not necessary to re-bore all cylinders in a block just because one
cylinder requires re-boring.
5. After honing and thoroughly cleaning cylinder bores, apply light oil to cylinder walls
to prevent rusting.
Pistons and Piston Rings
IMPORTANT: If engine was submerged while engine was running, piston pin and/or
connecting rod may be bent. If piston pin is bent, piston must be replaced. (Piston
pins are not sold separately because of matched fit into piston.) If piston pin is
bent, connecting rod must be checked for straightness (refer to “Connecting
Rods,” following, for checking straightness).
1. Inspect pistons for scoring and excessive piston skirt wear.
2. Check tightness of piston ring locating pins. Locating pins must be tight.
3. Thoroughly clean pistons. Carefully remove carbon deposits from pistons, with a soft
wire brush or carbon remove solution. Do not burr or round off machined edges.
Inspect piston ring grooves for wear and carbon accumulation. If necessary, scrape car-
bon from piston ring grooves being careful not to scratch sides of grooves. Refer to
procedure following for cleaning piston ring grooves.
CAUTION
Care must be taken not to scratch the side surfaces of the ring groove. Scratching
the side surface of the ring groove will damage the ring groove.
1. Use a bristle brush and carbon remover solution to remove carbon from side surfaces.
2. A tool can be made for cleaning the inner diameter of the tapered ring grooves. The
tool can be made from a broken tapered piston ring with the side taper removed to
enable the inside edge of the ring to reach the inner diameter of the groove. Carefully
scrape carbon from inner diameter of ring grooves. Care must be taken not to damage
the grooves by scratching the side surfaces of the grooves.
Piston with two half keystone (half tapered) rings (135/150 Models)
Enlarged View of
Piston Ring Grooves
2. Using a micrometer, measure dimension “B” at location shown. Dimension “B” should
be within 0.008 in. of dimension “A.”
a
0.700 in.
(17.78mm)
b
a - Dimension “A” at RIGHT Angle (90°) to Piston Pin
b - Dimension “B” (in line with Piston Pin)
a b
c
c
51847
a - Crankshaft Journals
b - Crocus Cloth
c - Work Cloth “Back-and-Forth”
WARNING
DO NOT spin-dry crankshaft ball bearing with compressed air.
6. Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft and crankshaft ball bearing. Re-
check surfaces of crankshaft. Replace crankshaft, if surfaces cannot be properly
“cleaned up.” If crankshaft will be re-used, lubricate surfaces of crankshaft with light
oil to prevent rust. DO NOT lubricate crankshaft ball bearing at this time.
Crankshaft (and End Cap) Bearings
1. After cleaning crankshaft, grasp outer race of crankshaft ball bearing (installed on low-
er end of crankshaft) and attempt to work race back-and-forth. There should not be
excessive play.
2. Lubricate ball bearing with light oil. Rotate outer bearing race. Bearing should have
smooth action and no rust stains. If ball bearing sounds or feels “rough” or has
“catches,” remove and discard bearing. (Refer to “Powerhead Removal and Disas-
sembly - Crankshaft Removal and Disassembly”.)
3. Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft center main roller bearings. Lubri-
cate bearings with 2-Cycle Outboard Oil.
CAUTION
DO NOT intermix halves of upper and lower crankshaft center main roller bear-
ings. Replace bearings in pairs only.
4. Thoroughly inspect center main roller bearings. Replace bearings if they are rusted,
fractured, worn, galled or badly discolored.
5. Clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft roller bearing that is installed in upper end cap.
Lubricate bearing with light oil.
6. Thoroughly inspect upper end cap roller bearing. If roller bearing is rusted, fractured,
worn, galled, badly discolored or loose inside of end cap replace end cap and roller
bearing as an assembly.
051
020
56161
Allowable reed opening is 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) or less. Replace reeds if either reed is
standing open more than 0.020 in. (0.51 mm).
a 51853
a - Pitting
4. Water Marks: When bearing surfaces are subjected to water contamination, a bear-
ing surface “etching” occurs. This etching resembles the size of the bearing.
51853
5. Spalling: Spalling is the loss of bearing surface, and it resembles flaking or chipping.
Spalling will be most evident on the thrust portion of the connecting rod in line with the
“I” beam. General bearing surface deterioration could be caused by or accelerated
by improper lubrication.
a 51853
a - Spalling
6. Chatter Marks: Chatter marks are the result of a combination of low speed - low load
- cold water temperature operation, aggravated by inadequate lubrication and/or im-
proper fuel. Under these conditions, the crankshaft journal is hammered by the con-
necting rod. As ignition occurs in the cylinder, the piston pushes the connecting rod
with tremendous force, and this force is transferred to the connecting rod journal.
Since there is little or no load on the crankshaft, it bounces away from the connecting
rod. The crankshaft then remains immobile for a split second until the piston travel
causes the connecting rod to catch up to the waiting crankshaft journal, then hammers
it. The repetition of this action causes a rough bearing surface(s) which resembles a
tiny washboard. In some instances, the connecting rod crank pin bore becomes highly
polished. During operation, the engine will emit a “whirr” and/or “chirp” sound when
it is accelerated rapidly from idle speed to approximately 1500 RPM, then quickly re-
turned to idle. If the preceding conditions are found, replace both the crankshaft and
connecting rod(s).
a
a 51853
a - Chatter Marks Between Arrows
aa 51853
CAUTION
Crocus cloth MUST BE USED to clean bearing surface at crankshaft end of con-
necting rod. DO NOT use any other type of abrasive cloth.
b. Clean CRANKSHAFT END of connecting rod by using CROCUS CLOTH
placed in a slotted 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter shaft, as shown. Chuck shaft in a drill
press and operation press at high speed while keeping connecting rod at a 90°
angle to slotted shaft.
51083
c. Clean PISTON PIN END of connecting rod, using same method as in Step “b”,
preceding, but using 320 grit carborundum cloth instead of crocus cloth.
d. Thoroughly wash connecting rods to remove abrasive grit. Recheck bearing sur-
faces of connecting rods. Replace any connecting rod(s) that cannot be properly
“cleaned up.” Lubricate bearing surfaces of connecting rods (which will be
re-used) with light oil to prevent rust.
Thermostats
1. Inspect thermostat covers and cylinder head covers (thermostat opening) for cracks
and corrosion damage that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary.
2. Remove and discard gasket from each thermostat.
3. Wash thermostats with clean water.
4. Using a thermostat tester, similar to the one shown, test each thermostat as follows:
a. Open thermostat valve, then insert a thread between valve and thermostat body.
Allow valve to close against thread.
b. Suspend thermostat (from thread) and thermometer inside tester so that neither
touches the container. Bottom of thermometer must be even with bottom of ther-
mostat to obtain correct temperature of thermostat opening.
c. Fill thermostat tester with water to cover thermostat.
d. Plug tester into electrical outlet.
e. Observe temperature at which thermostat begins to open. (Thermostat will drop
off thread, that was installed in Step “a”, when it starts to open.) Thermostat must
begin to open when temperature reaches 140°-145° F (60°-63° C).
f. Continue to heat water until thermostat is completely open.
g. Unplug thermostat tester.
h. Replace thermostat, if it fails to open at the specified temperature, or if it does not
fully open.
NOTE: BE SURE that water in thermostat tester is allowed to cool sufficiently [below 130°
F (56° C)] before testing the other thermostat.
51087
e
d
a b
51854
51852
a - Crankshaft
b - Crankshaft Ball Bearing
c - Suitable Mandrel
d - Press
e - Retaining Ring
3. If removed, spread new crankshaft sealing rings just enough to slide over crankshaft
journal.
4. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) and install crankshaft sealing rings into
groove.
51849
51854
a - Crankshaft Sealing Rings
5. Lubricate center main crankshaft roller bearings and races with light oil.
14
a b 51854
6. Place center main crankshaft roller bearings on upper and lower main bearing jour-
nals as shown.
7. Install center main bearing races as shown.
8. Secure center main bearing races together with retaining rings. Make sure retaining
ring bridges the separating lines of the bearing race.
FLYWHEEL END
51850
DRIVE SHAFT END
51847
a - Center Main Bearing Races
7
a
95 b
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
51849
14
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24)
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Oil Seal
b - O-ring
95
a
95
a - Oil Seal
b - Lip of End Cap
c - O-ring
Crankshaft Installation
SPECIAL INFORMATION
Installing A New Crankshaft Assembly Into Cylinder Block
Check the crankshaft sealing ring mating surfaces in the cylinder block and crankcase
cover for wear grooves that were caused by the crankshaft sealing rings from the previous
crankshaft. If wear grooves are present, the sealing rings on the new crankshaft will have
to fit into the grooves without binding the crankshaft.
Before installing crankshaft, remove any burrs that may exist on groove edges.
Lubricate sealing rings with light oil and install new crankshaft as instructed.
Install upper and lower end caps and then inspect fit between sealing rings and grooves.
Temporarily install crankcase cover and rotate crankshaft several times to check if sealing
rings are binding against crankshaft. (You will feel a drag on the crankshaft.) If sealing
rings are binding, recheck grooves for burrs. If this does not correct the problem, it is rec-
ommended that the cylinder block be replaced.
51848
a - Dowel Pins
6. Lubricate crankshaft ends (oil seal areas) with light oil, then install upper and lower
end caps (“a” and “b”). Secure end caps to cylinder block with attaching bolts. DO NOT
tighten end cap bolts at this time.
b
c
14 14
51848
a 51848
a
b
51851
b 51851
a - Sleeve (Part of Tool Assy. 91-74607A1)
b - Locating Washers
4. Insert piston pin tool (91-74607A1) and push sleeve out of piston. Keep piston pin tool
in piston.
5. Use a mallet and tap piston pin into piston and push piston pin tool out.
c
a b
51080
51086
a - Piston Pin Tool (91-74607A1)
b - Sleeve
c - Piston Pin
d - Piston Pin Tool
6. Install new piston pin lockrings (one each end of piston pin) with Lockring Installation
Tool (91-77109A1).
7. Make sure lockrings are properly seated in piston grooves.
51086
51086
a b
Piston Installation
1. Before installing new piston rings, check gap between ring ends by placing each ring
in its respective cylinder, then pushing ring about 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) into cylinder using
piston to assure proper position.
2. Check end gap of each new piston ring with a feeler gauge. End gap must be within
0.010 in. to 0.018 in. (0.25 mm to 0.45 mm). If end gap is greater, check other piston
rings in cylinder bore, until rings (within tolerance) are found.
IMPORTANT: Piston ring side with dot or letter must be facing up.
a
b
f
c d
51852
a - Piston Ring
b - Dots (Faces Up)
c - Feeler Gauge
d - Ring End Gap
e - Dot or Letter
f - Piston Ring
3. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) and install piston rings (dot side up) on each
piston. Spread rings just enough to slip over piston.
4. Check piston rings to be sure that they fit freely in ring groove.
5. Lubricate piston, rings and cylinder wall with 2-Cycle Outboard Oil.
aa
bb
56155
a - Piston Ring Expander
b - Dot Side “Up” on Piston Ring
6. Rotate each piston ring so end of ring is aligned with locating pin as shown.
7. Install Piston Ring Compressor.
8. Remove screws and connecting rod cap from piston rod assembly being installed.
IMPORTANT: Piston must be correctly installed and positioned as shown.
Pistons marked with the word “UP” and with the letter “P” or “S” on top of piston.
Pistons with the letter “P” must be installed in the port side of engine and the word “UP”
facing toward top of engine.
Pistons with the letter “S” must be installed in the star- board side of engine and the word
“UP” toward top of engine.
9. Coat cylinder bore with 2-cycle oil. Match piston assembly with cylinder it was re-
moved from, and position piston as described below. Push piston into cylinder.
14
UP UP
CYL 2 CYL 1
P S
UP UP
CYL 4 CYL 3
P S
UP UP
CYL 6 CYL 5
P S
56156
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-826666A24)
10. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon to bearing surface of connecting rod and install bear-
ing assembly, as shown.
11. Place connecting rod cap on connecting rod. Apply light oil to threads and face of con-
necting rod bolts. Thread connecting rod bolts finger-tight while checking for correct
alignment of the rod cap as shown.
IMPORTANT: Connecting rod and connecting rod caps are matched halves. Do not
torque screws before completing the following procedure.
• Run a pencil lightly over ground area.
• If pencil stops at fracture point, loosen bolts, retighten, and check again.
NOTE: If you still feel the fracture point, discard the rod.
12. Tighten connecting rod bolts (using a 5/16 in. - 12 point socket). First torque to 15 lb.
in. (1.7 N·m) then 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m). Turn each bolt an additional 90° after 2nd torque
is attained. Recheck alignment between rod cap and rod as shown.
aa
aa
95
13. Rotate crankshaft several times (using powerhead stand) to assure free operation
(no binds and catching).
Connecting Rod Cap Alignment
Check each connecting rod cap for correct alignment. If not aligned, a ridge can be seen
or felt at the separating line as shown below. Correct any misalignment.
End View End View
Side View End View Incorrect- Incorrect-Cap
Side View Incorrect-Cap Correct Not Aligned on Backwards
Correct on Backwards
Ä ÄÄ ÄÄ
Ä ÄÄ ÄÄ
Ä ÄÄ ÄÄ
Ä ÄÄ
14. Verify that no piston rings were broken during installation by pressing in on each piston
ring thru exhaust port using a screwdriver. If no spring tension exists (ring fails to re-
turn to position), it’s likely ring is broken and must be replaced.
51852
a - Screwdriver
a b
51852
a - Gasket Strips
b - Edge of Cover
3. Apply a thin, even coat of Loctite Master Gasket #203 on mating surfaces of crank-
case cover and cylinder block.
4. Place crankcase cover in position on cylinder block. Turn the 8 center main bolts in
a LITTLE at a time, (following torque sequence) compressing crankshaft seal rings
until crankshaft cover has been drawn down to cylinder block. Tighten eight bolts (a)
evenly in three progressive steps (following torque sequence).
5. Install remaining crankcase cover flange bolts.
6. Tighten end cap bolts to specified torque.
8 7
a b
d 4
1
3 2
e
51846
c
12
5 6
12 Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2)
a - Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2)
b - Upper End Cap Bolts – Torque to 150 lb. in. (17 N·m)
c - Lower End Cap Bolts – Torque to 80 lb. in. (9 N·m)
d - Add Light Oil to Threads and Bolt Face – 8 Bolts (3/8 in.-18)
Torque to 38 lb. ft. (51.5 N·m)
e - Bolts (5/16 in.-18) Torque to 180 lb. in. (20 N·m)
aa
6. If removed, install water pressure relief valve components as shown. Torque bolts to
specifications.
10
11
12
9
4
5
8
3
1
2 13
3
6 50803
7
1 - Cover
2 - Bolt - 150 lb. in. (17 N·m)
3 - Gasket
4 - Relief Valve Plate
5 - Diaphragm
6 - Water Deflector
7 - Washer
8 - Screw - 25 lb. in. (3 N·m)
9 - Spring
10 - Poppet Valve
11 - Grommet
12 - Carrier
13 - Washer
6 5
2 1 g
h
i
3 4 j
7 8
11 12 56168
k
l
a - Elbow (Starboard)
b - Sta-strap
c - Hose
d - Elbow (Port)
e - Bolt [Torque to 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m) and then turn 90°]
f - Bolt [Torque to 17 lb. ft. (23.0 N·m)]
g - Cover
h - Gasket
i - Thermostat (143°)
j - Temperature Sensor (Starboard)
k - Bolt [Torque to 17 lb. ft. (23.0 N·m)]
l - Retainer
NOTE: The temperature sender provides continuous temperature information to the ECU
while the engine is running. Should temperature reach approximately 221° F (104.5° C),
the ECU will activate a warning horn and warning light.
56163 56164
a - Thermostat (143° F 61.7° C)
b - Overheat Temperature Sensor
NOTE: When installing thermostat hoses, secure starboard to port thermostat hose (a)
with sta-straps (b) to prevent hose from being cut by alternator/air compressor belt.
a
b
14
19
15 18
12
16 5
4
17 95
15
3
2 1
30 6
29 8
7
28
27 9
31 10
11
23
26 95
24
A 25
41
40 32 42
37
36 33
35
44
38
43
39
34
WARNING
BE SURE that Lifting Eye is threaded into flywheel as far as possible BEFORE lift-
ing powerhead.
2. Using a hoist, lift powerhead high enough to allow removal of powerhead from repair
stand. Remove powerhead from repair stand, being careful not to damage drive shaft
housing gasket surface of powerhead.
3. Place a new gasket around powerhead studs and into position on base of powerhead.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply lubricant to top of driveshaft as this will prevent drive-
shaft from fully engaging into crankshaft.
4. Apply a small amount of 2-4-Cw/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) onto drive-
shaft splines.
5. Use hoist to lower powerhead onto driveshaft housing. It may be necessary to turn
flywheel (aligning crankshaft splines with driveshaft splines) so that powerhead will
be fully installed.
6. Install 10 flat washers and10 locknuts which secure powerhead to exhaust extension
plate/driveshaft housing. Torque locknuts in 3 progressive steps until secured.
7. Disconnect hoist from Lifting Eye and remove Lifting Eye from flywheel.
8. Reinstall plastic cap into center of flywheel cover.
b
51846
56162
9. Install fuel cooler inlet and outlet water hoses to fittings on exhaust adaptor plate and
poppet valve cover. Install air hose from port fuel rail to fitting on exhaust adaptor
plate. Secure all hoses with sta-straps.
b
d
56159 56158
c
a - Fuel Cooler Outlet Water Hose
b - Fuel Cooler Inlet Water Hose
c - Air Hose
d - Thermostat Cover Hose
11. Install 4 bolts securing bottom cowl halves and install bottom cowling.
52352
a
55932 55970 a
a - Bolt
c
a
b
a - Hose Clamp
b - Fuel Line
c - Trim Solenoids
14. Reconnect remote control harness to powerhead harness connector and wires as
shown.
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
GRN/WHT GRN/WHT aa
TAN
BRN/WHT
1 6
2 3 45
a
b
c
d
a f
b
c
d
a - TAN/BLACK
b - TAN/WHITE
c - PINK/LT. BLUE to PINK/LT. BLUE
d - ORANGE
e - Sta-Straps
f - Connect PURPLE to 12 Volt Source or Adjacent Gauge
IMPORTANT: Sufficient slack must exist in engine wiring harness, battery cables,
fuel hose, and oil hoses routed between clamp and engine attachment point, to re-
lieve stress and prevent hoses from being kinked or pinched.
1. Place the clamp over the wiring, hoses, and control cables as shown.
b
ÇÇÇ
c
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÉÉ
ÇÇÇÉÉÉ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÉÉ
d
ÇÇÇÉÉÉ
a
ÇÇÇÉÉÉ
e
g
f
a - Battery Cables
b - Remote Wiring Harness
c - Warning Gauge Wiring Harness
d - Control Cables
e - Oil Hose with Blue Stripe
f - Fuel Hose
g - Oil Hose
a
a - Shift Cable
b - Throttle Cable
Break-ln Procedure
CAUTION
Severe damage to the engine can result by not complying with the Engine Break-
in Procedure.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Do not use pre-mixed gas and oil in this engine. Use straight gasoline during engine
break-in and after engine break-in. The ECM is programmed to signal the oil pump to pro-
vide additional oil (50:1 ratio) during the first 120 minutes of operation. The ECM will moni-
tor this period through its own internal clock. At the end of this period, the ECM will signal
the oil pump to go to a standard ratio of 300 – 400:1 @ idle and 60:1 @ W.O.T.
INITIATING ENGINE BREAK-IN SEQUENCE
Refer to Section 3C for proper procedures.
ENGINE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE (ALL MODELS)
Vary the throttle setting during the first hour of operation. Avoid remaining at a constant
speed for more than two minutes and avoid sustained wide open throttle.
POWERHEAD
Section 4B - Cooling
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 1998/1999 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-5
Water Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 1999 1/2 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-6
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 Thermostat Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-7
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2 Water Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8
Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3
Water Pump Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-9
2.5 Liter Optimax/DFI Water Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3 Problem Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-10
Specifications
Water Pressure 4
Idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI Temperature Sensor(s) B
(6.8 – 20.5 kPa)
Between Black and No
Poppet Valve Opening 4 – 9 PSI each TAN/BLK wire. Continuity
(27.4 – 61.6 kPa)
Between each lead and No
W.O.T. 12.0 PSI (82.1 kPa) ground Continuity
Minimum
Special Tools
1. Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1
56725
270
255
240
225
210
195
180 Temperature Sensor
Temperature (F)
165
150
135
120
105
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2
Resistance (k)
Temperature Sensor
Two temperature sensors are used to provide cylinder head temperature information to
the ECM. A sensor is mounted in starboard cylinder head and one in the air compressor
cylinder head. The ECM uses this information to increase injector pulse width for cold
starts and to retard timing in the event of an over-heat condition.
An ohms test of the temperature sensor would be as follows:
Insert digital or analog ohmmeter test leads into both TAN/BLACK sensor leads. With en-
gine at temperature (F) indicated, ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%.
NOTE: The air compressor temperature sensor and cylinder head temperature sensors
are the same part number. The ECM has been programmed to activate a warning circuit
at different temperatures depending upon sensor location.
NOTE: The Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) can be used to monitor temperature read-
ings from all three temperature sensors.
Water flow exiting the cylinder block is controlled by the thermostats (1 in each cylinder
head) and the poppet valve (located at the bottom starboard side of powerhead). At low
RPM (below 1500 RPM), the thermostats control water flow depending upon engine tem-
perature. When the thermostats are open, water passes through the cylinder heads and
exits to the drive shaft housing. At higher RPM (above 1500 RPM) the poppet valve will
control the water flow.
Water that passes through the poppet valve enters water passages in the adaptor plates.
Water passes through the adaptor plates into the driveshaft housing.
Water dumped into the drive shaft housing builds up a wall of water around the exhaust
tube. This performs 2 functions:
• Helps silence the exhaust
• Prevents air from being drawn into the pump
Water exits the engine in 3 locations:
• Excess water from the wall of water exits around anodes on the gear housing.
• Water that passes through the air compressor exits out the tell tail.
• Water exits through two 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) holes in the lower adaptor plate into the
exhaust.
To allow complete passage filling and to prevent steam pockets, all cooling passages are
interconnected. Small passages are incorporated to allow the cooling system to drain.
NOTE: When installing thermostat hoses, secure starboard to port thermostat hose (a)
with sta-straps (b) to prevent hose from being cut by alternator/air compressor belt.
a
b
6
B
BOTTOM VIEW
10
11
Lower Unit and Water Pump
B
1 - Air Compressor
2 - Cylinder Head Cover – Removed from head for illustra-
tion, normally part of head casting 13
9 3 - Thermostats (2) 143° F (61.6° C) – If stuck closed, engine
will overheat at idle.
4 - Strainer Screen for air compressor water supply – If re-
stricted, compressor will overheat and tell-tale will be weak.
4 12 5 - Exhaust Divider Plate – Separated for illustration
6 - Poppet Valve – Controls water flow at high RPM.
Note: If poppet valve is stuck open at low RPM, the engine
will not reach proper operating temperature (run cold) and
will run rough at idle.
2 7 - Fuel Cooler – If internal leak occurs, fuel will be forced into
cooling system.
8 - Water Outlet from Air Compressor – Connects to tell-tale
outlet on bottom cowl.
9 - Water Dump Holes Exhaust Cooling (2 each) 1/8 in. (3.175 mm)
1 – If holes are plugged, tuner pipe will melt and bearing carrier
8
prop shaft seals will be damaged.
3
10- Water Tube
57339 11- Wall of Water – If water level height is insufficient, water
pump may draw in air resulting in an overheated engine.
12- Check Valve for powerhead flush.
13- Excess water from wall of water around exhaust bucket exits
around anodes.
3
7
6
BOTTOM VIEW
1 - Air Compressor
2 - Cylinder Head Cover – Removed from head for illustra-
tion, normally part of head casting 57339
3 - Thermostats (2) 143° F (61.6° C) – If stuck closed, engine 13
will overheat at idle.
9 4 - Strainer Screen for air compressor water supply – If re-
stricted, compressor will overheat and tell-tale will be weak.
5 - Exhaust Divider Plate – Separated for illustration
4 12 6 - Poppet Valve – Controls water flow at high RPM.
Note: If poppet valve is stuck open at low RPM, the engine
will not reach proper operating temperature (run cold) and
will run rough at idle.
7 - Fuel Cooler – If internal leak occurs, fuel will be forced into
2 cooling system.
8 - Water Outlet from Air Compressor – Connects to fuel cooler and
then to tell-tale outlet on bottom cowl.
9 - Water Dump Holes Exhaust Cooling (2 each) 1/8 in. (3.175 mm)
1 – If holes are plugged, tuner pipe will melt and bearing carrier
prop shaft seals will be damaged.
3 10- Water Tube
11- Wall of Water – If water level height is insufficient, water
pump may draw in air resulting in an overheated engine.
57389 12- Check Valve for powerhead flush.
13- Excess water from wall of water around exhaust bucket exits
around anodes.
Troubleshooting
Thermostat Test
1. Inspect thermostat covers and cylinder head covers (thermostat opening) for cracks and
corrosion damage that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary.
2. Remove and discard gasket from each thermostat.
3. Wash thermostats with clean water.
4. Using a thermostat tester, similar to the one shown, test each thermostat as follows:
a. Open thermostat valve, then insert a thread between valve and thermostat body. Al-
low valve to close against thread.
b. Suspend thermostat (from thread) and thermometer inside tester so that neither
touches the container. Bottom of thermometer must be even with bottom of thermo-
stat to obtain correct temperature of thermostat opening.
c. Fill thermostat tester with water to cover thermostat.
d. Plug tester into electrical outlet.
e. Observe temperature at which thermostat begins to open. (Thermostat will drop off
thread, that was installed in Step “a”, when it starts to open.) Thermostat must begin
to open when temperature reaches 140°-145° F (60°-63° C).
f. Continue to heat water until thermostat is completely open.
g. Unplug thermostat tester.
h. Replace thermostat, if it fails to open at the specified temperature, or if it does not
fully open.
NOTE: BE SURE that water in thermostat tester is allowed to cool sufficiently [below 110°F
(43.3° C)] before testing the other thermostat.
51087
IMPORTANT: DO NOT operate engine without thermostats installed.
b 56141
a
d c
e
f 52582 9 Loctite Pipe Sealant w/Teflon-592
WARNING
Shut off engine and refer to troubleshooting chart if water pressure is not within
specification. DO NOT exceed 3000 RPM in neutral.
2. Inspect the water pump impeller for wear on the end, top and bottom of the impeller
blades. Replace the impeller if this condition is found.
3. Inspect for proper bonding between the hub and the impeller. Replace the impeller if im-
proper bonding is found.
a b
a - Hub
b - Impeller
4. Inspect the impeller blades to see if they are cracked, burnt, hard or deformed. Replace
the impeller if the blades are in this condition.
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be dis-
regarded when inspecting cover and plate. The depth of the groove will not affect wa-
ter pump output.
5. Replace cover if plastic is melted from excessive heat (lack of water). Replace stainless
insert and/or face plate if grooves (other than impeller sealing bead groove) are more
than 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) deep.
a
c
b
d 57408
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that the water pump impeller be replaced whenever
the gearcase is removed for maintenance. However, if it is necessary to re-use the
impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation as premature impeller failure
will occur.
Problem Diagnosis
Condition Recommended Range Possible Cause
Pressure below specification @ 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) •Poppet valve spring defective
idle (weak, broken, missing)
•Defective poppet valve seal
•Thermostat stuck open
•Severe internal leak
•Low output water pump
•Inlet restriction
•Strainer screen for air compres-
sor water supply is restricted
Pressure above 5 psi (34.2kPa) 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) •Plugged poppet by-pass pas-
@ idle sage or fuel cooler
Pressure does not drop between 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) be- •Wrong poppet valve spring
1000 – 2500 RPM indicating pop- tween 1000 – 2200 RPM •Low output water pump
pet valve has opened •Inlet restriction
•Poppet valve vent hole plugged
or restricted
•Severe internal leak
•Defective poppet valve seal
Poppet valve flutter/water pres- 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) be- •Wrong poppet valve spring
sure drop does not stabilize prior tween 1000 – 2200 RPM •Low output water pump
to 2500 RPM •Inlet restriction
•Broken diaphragm in poppet
valve
•Severe internal leak
•Defective poppet valve seal
Pressure is below minimum spec- 12 PSI (54.9 – 68.5kPa) •Inlet restriction
ification @ W.O.T. •Engine mounted too high on
transom
•Engine trimmed out too far
•Configuration of boat bottom in-
terfering with adequate flow of
water to coolant inlets
•Severe internal leak
•Low output water pump
•Plugged strainer screen for air
compressor water supply
Pressure higher than normal @ Maximum pressure – 23 PSI •Outlet water passages restricted.
W.O.T., but engine still indicates (157.4 kPa) •Steam pocket has formed at top
overheat condition of powerhead due to lack of cool-
ing water
MID-SECTION
Section 5A – Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing
Table of Contents
Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2 Removal and Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
Transom Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4 Reassembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-11
Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube . . . . . . 5A-6
Drive Shaft Housing and Dyna-Float
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
5
A
15 14
13 95
12 17
11
10
21
A
16
B
95 18
9
95
8 24
95 25
26
1
2 3
29
23
7 28
22
7
30
95 27
3 5
4
95
19
20
Transom Brackets
95
17 16 95
95
5
6
3 14
2
95 4
95 15
14
13
12
18
1
95
7
8
9
10
11
Transom Brackets
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (STARBOARD)(BLACK)
2 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PORT) (BLACK)
3 1 GREASE FITTING (PORT) 80 9
4 1 TILT TUBE
5 1 NUT (1 IN.-14) 45 61
6 1 O-RING
7 2 WAVE WASHER
8 1 NUT (7/8-14) 45 61
9 4 BOLT
10 4 WASHER
11 4 NUT
12 1 TILT LOCK LEVER ASSEMBLY
13 1 SPRING
14 2 BUSHING
15 1 SPRING
16 1 KNOB
17 1 GROOVE PIN
18 1 PIN
26
38
25
23
32
33
95
31 95 24
62 37
35
23
30
96 22
36
34
21
29 28
19
7
20
36 1
18
27
3 17
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
4
23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 12
36 P80 Rubber Lubricant
(Purchase Locally) 5 11
13 6
62 Permabond 105 Cyanacrylate Adhesive
(Purchase Locally) 8
14 10
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) 2
16
96 Loctite Superbonder 454 Gel (Purchase Locally) 15 7 9
33
33 Loctite “RCA/680” Retaining Compound (92-809833)
c
a
b
d
e
51858
a b
a - Shift Shaft Assembly
b - Bushing
c - Lock Nut
d - Washer (2)
e - Bushing (Hidden)
f - Spring
g - Guide Block
aa
b 51850
a - Drive Shaft Housing Plate
b - Drive Shaft Housing
b c
d 51850
51857
a - Water Tube
b - Exhaust Diffuser
c - Exhaust Tube
d - Drive Shaft Housing
6. Remove all gasket material from driveshaft housing and related components.
7. Remove bolts, which secure lower mount retainers to drive shaft housing, and remove
retainers.
8. Remove rubber caps from lower mount bolts.
51855
a - Bolts
b - Lower Mount Retainer (One Each Side)
51855
a - Lower Mount Nuts
b - Lower Mount
10. Remove driveshaft housing from swivel bracket by pulling alternately from top to bot-
tom on housing.
11. Remove upper and lower mounts by lifting them out of driveshaft housing.
Reassembly and Installation
1. Apply a thin coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto inside portion of exhaust
tube seal.
2. Install exhaust tube seal into driveshaft housing with tapered side of seal facing up.
51856
a - Exhaust Tube Seal
b - Driveshaft Housing
3. Push exhaust tube boots onto tabs on each side of exhaust tube.
4. Position exhaust tube in drive shaft housing and push down on tube until boots rest
in grooves on inside of housing.
5. Position driveshaft housing to plate gasket on top of housing.
6. Install an exhaust diffuser gasket and exhaust diffuser onto plate, then secure both
to plate with 6 bolts. Clean bolts with Loctite 7649 Primer and then apply Loctite 271
to bolt threads. Torque bolts to 60 Ib. in. (7.0 Nm).
b
b
51856 51857
a - Exhaust Tube
b - Exhaust Tube Boots
c - Exhaust Diffuser Gasket
d - Exhaust Diffuser
7. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto water tube seal.
8. Install water tube seal into driveshaft housing plate with plastic end of seal facing up
and install water tube.
b
51856
a - Water Tube Seal
b - Driveshaft Housing Plate
d
b
d c
51857
a - Water Tube Seal (Plastic End)
b - Dyna-Float Mounts
c - Rubber Washers
d - Metal Washer
13. Install a ground strap onto one of the lower mount mounting bolts.
NOTE: Apply Perfect Seal along length of lower mount bolts.
14. Insert a mounting bolt thru the short end of each lower mount.
15. Position a mount on each lower side of driveshaft housing.
16. Install a flat washer over each lower mounting bolt.
17. Position a bumper on steering arm between mounting bolts.
18. Start upper mounting bolts in upper mounts and align lower mounting bolts with holes
in swivel pin yoke. Slide driveshaft housing up against yoke and bumper.
19. Secure upper mounts to steering arm with flat washers and self-locking nuts. Torque
nuts to 50 Ib. ft. (68.0 Nm).
20. Install ground strap (if equipped) between port lower mount bolt and swivel bracket.
21. Secure lower mounts to swivel pin yoke with self- locking nuts. Torque nuts to 50 Ib.
ft. (68.0 Nm). Place a rubber cap over each lower mounting bolt head.
22. Install lower mount retainers and secure each retainer with 2 bolts. (Secure ground
strap with the nearest retainer bolt.) Torque bolts to 160 Ib. in. (18.0 Nm).
f
a
e
c g
d 51855
f 51855
a - Lower Mount
b - Nut [Torque to 50 lb. ft. (68.0 Nm)]
c - Rubber Cap
d - Ground Strap (only one side)
e - Lower Mount Retainer
f - Bolts [Torque to 160 lb. in. (18.0 Nm)]
g - Ground Strap
23. Install lower mount covers and secure each cover with 2 screws.
24. Install exhaust extension plate on driveshaft housing with shift shaft assembly. Secure
extension plate to drive shaft housing with 5 bolts.
e
c
a
h
d
f
b
51855 51858
a - Cover (One Each Side)
b - Screws (Two for Each Cover)
c - Shift Shaft Linkage
d - Exhaust Extension Plate
e - Exhaust Plate to Driveshaft Housing Bolts, Torque to 25 Ib. ft. (34 Nm)
f - Drive Shaft Housing Plate
g - Lower Mount Cover (One Each Side)
h - Mounting Bracket Bolts, Torque to 40 Ib. ft. (54 Nm)
MID-SECTION
Section 5B – Power Trim
Table of Contents
Power Trim Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-21
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2 Testing Power Trim System With Test
Power Trim Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-4 Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23
Power Trim Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6 “UP” Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23
Power Trim - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 “DOWN” Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-26
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Hydraulic Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-28
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Trim Rod End Cap Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-29
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Tilt Ram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-30
Tilting Outboard Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-31
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9 Scraper Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-34
Striker Plate Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9 Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Anode Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 Trim Pump Motor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Trim Indicator Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 Motor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Check, Fill and Purge - Power Trim System . . 5B-10
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-39
Motor Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-40
5
Power Trim System with Relays and 2 Wire Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-44 B
Trim Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-14 Reassembly - Motor and Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-46
Electrical System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Priming Power Trim System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47
General Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Trim Sender Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47
Troubleshooting the “Down Circuit” . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Trim Indicator Gauge Needle Adjustment . . . . 5B-48
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-16 Trim Indicator Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-49
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits
(All Circuits Inoperative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-17
Power Trim Assembly Removal and Installation . 5B-18
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-18
Test Reading
Trim “UP” 1300 PSI (91kg/cm2)
Maximum Pressure
Trim “DOWN” 500 PSI (35kg/cm2)
Minimum Pressure
Special Tools
1. Alignment Tool 91-11230
17238
2. Trim Rod Removal Tool 91-44486A1
51337
3. Trim Rod Guide Removal Tool 91-44487A1
51337
4. Power Trim Test Gauge Kit 91-52915A6
73835
54458
51337
a b
109
36
6 33
34
35
5 5
6
5 5 6 37
6 6 4 20
6
7 110
38
18
21
13
13 19
13 16
3 17
15
8 13
13 13
14
10 13
9
9
13
94 13 32
11
26 13
25
1 12
2
3
31 7
30
27
24
29 13
28
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb.in. lb.ft. N·m
– 1 POWER TRIM MOTOR
1 1 BRUSH AND SEAL KIT
2 1 ARMATURE KIT
3 1 END FRAME (Complete)
WARNING
Excessive trim “Out” may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To cor-
rect instability, reduce the power gradually and trim the outboard “In” slightly be-
fore resuming high speed operation. A rapid reduction in power will result in a
sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional boat instability.
Will lift boat bow, increasing top speed.
Transfers steering torque harder to port (left) on installations below 23 in. (584.2 mm) tran-
som height.
Increases gearcase clearance over submerged objects.
Excess trim can cause “porpoising” and/or ventilation.
WARNING
Excessive outboard trim angle will result in insufficient water supply causing
water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Insure water level is above
water intake holes whenever outboard is running.
The “Up” circuit actuates the up solenoid (under outboard cowl) and closes the motor cir-
cuit. The electric motor drives the pump, forcing fluid thru passageways into the up side
of the trim cylinders.
The trim cylinders position the outboard at the desired trim angle in the 20 degree maxi-
mum trim range. The system will not allow the outboard to be trimmed above the 20 de-
gree trim range as long as the engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM.
The outboard can be trimmed above the 20 degree maximum trim angle (for shallow wa-
ter operation, etc.), by keeping the engine RPM below 2000. If the RPM increases over
2000, propeller thrust (if propeller is deep enough) will cause the trim system to return the
outboard to the 20 degree maximum trim position.
WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may result in undesirable and/or unsafe
steering conditions. Test for handling characteristics after any adjustment is
made to the trim angle (and tilt pin location).
Aids planing, particularly with heavy loads.
Improves ride in choppy water conditions.
Excess trim “In” can cause “bow steer” (boat veers to left or right).
Transfers steering torque to starboard (right).
Improves acceleration to planing speed.
The “Down” circuit actuates the down solenoid (under engine cowl) and closes the motor
circuit. The electric motor drives the pump in the opposite direction as the up circuit, forc-
ing fluid thru passageways into the “down” side of the tilt ram. The tilt ram moves the en-
gine down to the desired position.
Trailering Outboard
The “Up” circuit first moves the trim cylinders; when the trim cylinders extend fully, the tilt
ram extends to tilt the outboard to the full up position for trailering.
Before the boat is trailered, the operator should check for clearance between the outboard
skeg and pavement to prevent damage to skeg from striking pavement.
If the outboard must be tilted for clearance between skeg and pavement, a device such
as a “Transom Saver” should be installed to prevent stress to boat transom from outboard
weight while the boat/outboard are being trailered.
Tilting Outboard Manually
WARNING
Before opening the manual release valve knob, insure all persons are clear of out-
board as outboard will drop to full “Down” when valve is opened.
The outboard can be raised or lowered manually by opening the manual release valve
3 to 4 turns counterclockwise. Close manual release valve to hold outboard at the desired
tilt position.
51353
a
a - Manual Release Valve
51353
a
a - Trim Angle Adjustment Bolt
c
b
a
27930
a - Striker Plate (2)
b - Lockwasher
c - Locknut. Torque to 80 lb. in. (9.0 Nm)
Anode Plate
Anode plate is a self-sacrificing alloy plate that is consumed gradually by corrosion while
providing protection to the midsection and power trim from galvanic corrosion. Replace
anode plate when it is 50% consumed.
a 27932
a - Anode Plate
CAUTION
Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever before checking fluid
level. System is pressurized. Extend trim and tilt rams fully to depressurize sys-
tem.
Remove fill plug and O-ring. System is full when oil level is present at filler hole. Tighten
fill plug securely.
NOTE: Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA, Dexron II or Dexron III may be
used.
51368
a - Tilt Lock Lever
TO FILL:
IMPORTANT: This trim system is pressurized. Remove “Fill” plug only when out-
board is tilted to the full “Up” position or the trim/tilt rams are fully extended. Re-
tighten “Fill” plug before tilting outboard down or retracting tilt/trim rams. Remove
“Fill” plug and O-ring. System is full when oil level is present at fill hole. Tighten
“Fill” plug securely.
a
b
51344
TO PURGE:
IMPORTANT: Fill plug and O-ring must be tightened securely before purging sys-
tem.
IMPORTANT: Run Trim System in short “jogs” until pump is primed and trim sys-
tem moves. If trim motor is run without priming pump, driveshaft failure could re-
sult.
Cycle outboard through entire trim/tilt range 4 times. Check fluid level after purging sys-
tem.
Push down on outboard when trim rams are slightly extended. If rams retract more than
1/8 in. (3.2 mm), air is present in system. Cycle system again and check fluid level.
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT: Determine if Electrical or Hydraulic problem exists.
IMPORTANT: Acceptable power trim leak down should not exceed 1 in. (25.4 mm)
(when measured at the tilt ram) in a 24 hour period.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
IMPORTANT: Make one correction at a time. Check operation of trim system before
proceeding to the next check.
5
External Mounted Hydraulic 6
System 51491
PROBLEM
1. Battery low or discharged.
2. Open circuit in trim wiring.
3. Wiring reversed in remote control.
4. Wire harness corroded through.
5. Internal motor problem (brushes, shorted armature).
6. Blown fuse(s).
7. Trim switch failure.
8. Verify relays are functioning correctly.
7
4
3
9
8 6
53794
UP Relay DOWN Relay
BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
10 GRN = Green
RED = Red
WHT = White
No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated: Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 4 and black lead to ground.
Point 3. Depress “Down” trim button. If
battery voltage is indicated, wire
is open between Points 4 and 1.
No Voltage Indicated:
Relay good: Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indi-
•Pump motor wiring is defec-
cated, trim switch is faulty. If no
tive.
battery voltage, check for loose
•Pump motor is defective. or corroded connection at Point
5 or open circuit in wire supply-
ing current to Point 5.
No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated: Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 7 and black lead to ground.
Point 9. Depress “Up” trim button. If bat-
tery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 7 and 8.
No Voltage Indicated:
Red wire is open between Point Battery Voltage Indicated:
3 and red terminal on back of
the ignition switch. There is an open circuit in wire
between Point 5 and Red ter-
•Check for loose or corroded
minal on the back of the ignition
connections.
switch.
•Check for open in wire.
a
51377 50605
a - Clamps
b - Tilt Lock Lever
WARNING
Failure to support outboard as shown could result in personal injury and/or dam-
age to outboard or boat.
c
b
51346
c
a - Tilt Lock Lever
b - Support Tool
c - Retaining Clips
IMPORTANT: Support outboard as shown above to prevent engine from tipping
when power trim retaining pin is removed.
SUPPORT TOOL
3/8 in. diameter metal rod (a used shift shaft works well)
14”
aa a
2”
1/4”
a - Drill holes for retaining clips
METRIC CONVERSION
14 in. = 35.56 cm 2 in. = 50.8 mm
3/8 in. = 9.5 mm 1/4 in. = 6.35 mm
CAUTION
Disconnect battery cables at battery before removing power trim wires from sole-
noids.
3. Disconnect power trim wires at solenoids (BLUE, GREEN, and BLACK) or if relay
style, disconnect (BLUE and GREEN) bullet connector harness.
4. Open filler cap and release any remaining pressure in the system.
IMPORTANT: Outboards equipped with thru-the-tilt-tube steering - remove steer-
ing link arm from end of steering cable and cable retaining nut from tilt tube.
b
51339 51354
a - Filler Cap
b - Retaining Nut
5. Remove outboard transom mounting bolts, and loosen tilt tube nut until nut is flush
with end of tilt tube thread.
6. Remove 3 screws and washers and move starboard transom bracket.
c d
a
51375 51375
IMPORTANT: Cross pin (a) should not be reused. Replace with new cross pin.
7. Drive out cross pin, push out upper swivel pin, and remove 3 screws and washers
retaining trim system. Remove system from outboard.
b
a
51339
a - Cross Pin
b - Upper Swivel Pin
c - Port Transom Bracket Screws and Washers (3). Remove to Release Trim
System from Outboard.
Installation
1. Paint any exposed metal surfaces to prevent corrosion.
2. Apply Loctite 271 to screws. Install trim system, starboard transom bracket, and tilt
tube nut.
3. Use a 12 volt power source to extend tilt ram up to align upper swivel shaft hole and
end of ram. Connect trim motor wires [BLUE wire to POSITIVE (+), BLACK wire to
NEGATIVE (–)]. If ram extends too far, retract ram by connecting GREEN wire to POS-
ITIVE (+).
4. Install Upper Swivel Pin with slotted end to left (port) side of engine.
c
e
d
f
a b
51375
c b
6. Connect trim motor wires to solenoids. Refer to Wiring Diagrams in this manual. Route
trim wires as specified in this manual.
NOTE: The 2 power leads going to the trim motor should be encapsulated with conduit
tubing. If tubing has not been previously installed, order 32-828547-353 and cut to ap-
propriate length.
56921 56922
a - Conduit Tubing
7. Apply marine sealer to shanks of mount bolts and install transom mount bolts.
IMPORTANT: Do not use an impact driver to tighten transom mount bolts.
Apply marine sealer to threads of mount bolts. Secure with flat washers and locknuts. Be
sure installation is watertight.
8. Tighten tilt tube nut securely.
IMPORTANT: Outboards equipped with thru-the-tilt-tube steering: Tighten steering
cable retaining nut securely to tilt tube.
a 51354
a - Steering Cable Retaining Nut
WARNING
Electrical wires passing through cowl openings must be protected from chafing
or being cut. Follow the recommended procedures outlined in Section 1D of this
Manual. Failure to protect wires as described could result in electrical system fail-
ure and/or injury to occupants of boat.
ee d c bb
ff a d c 54457
54458
5. Thread hose from Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) into brass fitting on adaptor.
e
a
d
b
c
54459
a - Brass Fitting
b - Test Gauge Assembly
c - Tilt Pin (Position in Hole Shown)
d - Hose
e - Hose (Not Used)
CAUTION
Failure to install spare tilt pin (or hardened bolts and nuts) in hole shown could
result in transom bracket failure and possible injury.
8. Move outboard “IN” until hole in swivel bracket “ear” aligns with the 3rd tilt hole in tran-
som bracket. Lock engine in trim range by installing a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter tilt pin
or two 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) hardened bolts and nuts thru the transom brackets and swivel
bracket in the hole shown.
a 54460
a - Tilt Pin Hole (Install Spare Tilt Pin or Hardened Bolts and Nuts)
a b
51374
10. Run trim “UP”. The minimum pressure should be 1300 P.S.I. (91 kg/cm2).
11. Run trim “DOWN” to release pressure and remove spare tilt pin or bolts and nuts.
12. Tilt outboard full “UP” and engage tilt lock lever.
13. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure.
14. Remove test gauge hose and adapter.
15. Reinstall Manual Release Valve and secure valve with circlip.
16. Retighten “Fill” plug.
NOTE: If pressure is less than 1300 PSI (91 kg/cm 2), troubleshoot system per instructions
on page 5B-16.
f a e d c b
a - Test Adaptor (91-822778A3)
b - O-ring Installation Tool
c - Small O-ring (Install 1st)
d - Medium O-ring (Install 2nd)
e - Large O-ring (Install Last)
f - Brass Fitting
g - Apply Teflon Tape
54458
a - Test Adaptor (91-822778A3)
5. Thread hose from Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) into brass fitting on adaptor.
e
a d
g
b
c f 54459
a - Brass Fitting
b - Test Gauge Assembly
c - Tilt Pin (Position in Hole Shown)
d - Hose
e - Hose (Not Used)
f - OPEN Valve
g - CLOSE Valve
Hydraulic Repair
TRIM ROD REMOVAL AND REPAIR
NOTE: Power Trim does not have to be removed from outboard to remove trim rods.
1. Tilt outboard to full “UP” position and engage tilt lock lever.
2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed reservoir pressure.
3. Turn Manual Release Valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise) to bleed remaining pres-
sure.
4. Remove trim rod cylinder caps.
NOTE: Place a clean pan under trim system to catch fluid.
c
a
b
b
51353 51337
5. Install trim rod removal tool and pull trim rod from cylinder.
aa
27933
a - Trim Rod Removal Tool (91-44486A1)
CAUTION
Do not remove check valve (a). Check valve is preset to operate at a specific pres-
sure. Removal and installation of check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible system damage.
NOTE: Check valve is in port side trim rod only.
1. Inspect check valve and check valve screen for debris; if debris cannot be removed,
replace trim rod assembly. Clean trim rod with parts cleaner and dry with compressed
air.
b 51352
a - Check Valve
b - Check Valve Screen
51343
a - Seal (remove as shown)
2. Install trim rods and caps. Use installation tool (91-44487A1) or spanner wrench
(91-74951) to tighten caps securely.
a
a
c c
b b
51353
a - Trim Rods
b - Cylinder End Caps
c - Rod End Rollers (lubricate with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or Special
Lubricant 101)
Tilt Ram
REMOVAL - TILT ROD ASSEMBLY ONLY
NOTE: Tilt Rod Assembly can be removed from cylinder without removing entire power
trim system from outboard.
TILT RAM COMPONENTS
7
6
2
2
5
3
2 2
2
10 4
1
8 9
11
51372
1 - Housing - Tilt Ram 7 - Oil Seal
2 - O-ring* (5) 8 - Bolt (Design 1)
3 - Memory Piston** 9 - Nut (Design 2)
4 - Washer 10 - Tilt Rod (Design 1)
5 - Piston Assembly 11 - Tilt Rod (Design 2)
6 - End Cap
*O-ring Repair Kit Available, P.N. 811607A1 (Includes item 7, Oil Seal)
**Memory piston (3) for tilt rods (10 and 11) are different and must be used with correct
tilt rod/cylinder assembly. Memory piston for Design 1 tilt rod is flat, Design 2 is dished
to clear nut and thread.
CAUTION
Insure trim system is depressurized prior to tilt ram removal.
1. Remove cross pin.
2. Remove lower swivel pin.
b
51355
a 51366
Disassembly
1. Secure tilt ram in a soft jawed vise. Remove tilt rod and cap.
91-74951
51337
51364
a - Cap (Turn Counterclockwise to Remove)
b - Spanner Wrench (91-74951)
c - Tilt Rod - Pull to Remove
2. Clamp tilt rod in a soft jawed vise. Remove bolt or nut as applicable to disassemble
rod assembly. Remove O-ring.
a
b
51378
51340
IMPORTANT: Note Design 1 and 2 on page 5B-31. Design 1 tilt rod assembly re-
places either tilt rod assembly. Either design will fit as a (replace) cylinder assem-
bly complete.
Design 2 will NOT fit a cylinder originally using a Design 1 tilt rod assembly.
Memory Pistons for Design 1 and 2 differ also and must be used only on the cylin-
der the piston was removed from.
3. Remove washer, check valve assemblies, and piston.
NOTE: Check valve held in by roll pin can be cleaned but not removed.
a
51363
a - Washer
b - Check Valve Assembly (7)
c - Piston
b c
51376
a - End Cap
b - Allen Plug
c - Hole In Shaft
6. Lubricate shaft with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. Insert shaft into
cylinder.
51342
51365
WARNING
Memory Piston Cup may be expelled at a high velocity when air pressure is
applied. Failure to place cylinder as shown below could result in personal injury.
8. Place cylinder as shown. Hold down on cylinder and inject air into shaft opening.
51353
a - Shop Cloth
b - Solid Surface
c - Air Nozzle
9. Remove shaft after Memory Piston Cup has been expelled. Replace allen plug re-
moved in Step 5 and tighten securely.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Inspect all internal parts for damage or wear. Clean and replace parts as necessary.
2. Inspect tilt rod for scratches. Replace scraper seal in rod end cap if tilt rod is scratched
or worn.
3. Slight scratches or tool marks less than 0.005 in. (0.1 mm) deep in cylinder are accept-
able.
Scraper Seal Replacement
1. Remove components from end cap.
d
b
a
e
c
b
a - Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Scraper Seal
d - Washer
e - Retaining Ring
REASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT: Components must be clean for reassembly. Any debris in the system
can cause the system to malfunction.
NOTE: Refer to “Tilt Ram Components” for proper O-ring sizes.
1. Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid on O-rings prior to reassembly.
2. Install O-ring on Memory Piston Cup and install in cylinder.
b
a
51372
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston Cup (Design 1 shown)
d f
b
a
e
51376
c
b
a - End Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Scraper seal
d - Washer
e - Retaining Ring
f - End Cap
e d
c
b
a
c
51363
51340
a - Piston
b - O-ring
c - Check Valve Assembly (7)
d - Washer
e - Bolt or Locknut. (Tighten securely)
6. Clamp cylinder in a soft jawed vise and install tilt rod assembly. Use spanner wrench
and tighten end cap securely.
91-74951 c
b
51337
51341
a - Cylinder
b - Tilt Rod Assembly
c - End Cap (Tighten Securely.) Use Spanner Wrench.
a 51369
a - Alignment Tool (91-11230)
b - Shaft
3. Install shaft.
a
b
d
c
51348 51352
a - Alignment Tool (91-11230)
b - Shaft
c - Groove
d - Hole [Groove (c) will Align with this Hole]
51356
a - Pin (Drive Against Knurled End)
53774
a a
53774
a - Screw (2)
2. Remove frame and armature from end cap. Use care not to drop armature.
a b
c
53779
a - Frame
b - Armature
c - End Cap
Armature Tests
TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature on a Growler per the Growler manufacturer’s instructions. Replace ar-
mature if a short is indicated.
TEST FOR GROUND
1. Use an Ohmmeter (Rx1 scale). Connect one lead on armature shaft and other lead
on commutator. If continuity is indicated, armature is grounded. Replace armature.
53786
53775
a - Commutator
FIELD TESTS
IMPORTANT: Commutator end of armature must be installed in brushes when per-
forming the following tests.
d
53779
a - Frame
b - Armature
c - Shim
d - Brush Card Assembly
e - O-rings
BRUSH REPLACEMENT
1. Brush replacement is required if brushes are pitted, chipped, or if distance (a) be-
tween the brush pigtail and end of brush holder slot is 1/16 in. or less. Check distance
with armature installed.
53784
a - 1/16 in.
a c
a - Spade Terminal
b - Crimped Brush Lead
c - Screws
c d
b
e
53778
a - Brush Card
b - Metal Connector
c - Spade Connector
d - Screws and Lockwashers
e - O-ring
53783 53785
a - Seal (Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to seal lips)
b - O-ring
c - Bushing
3. If trim motor is overheated, a thermoswitch located under brush card will open. Nor-
mally, this switch will reset itself within 1 minute.
a
53781
a - Thermoswitch
Reassembly
IMPORTANT: Components must be clean. Any debris in power trim system can
cause system to malfunction.
1. Install armature into end cap/brush card assembly.
d
b
53779 53784
a - Armature
b - Shim
c - End Cap Assembly
d - Armature (Spread brushes to install armature into end cap)
a
a
53784 53783
a - O-rings
IMPORTANT: Attach Vise Grip pliers to armature shaft before installing frame as-
sembly. The Vise Grip pliers will prevent the armature from being drawn out of the
brush card assembly by the frame magnets while installing the frame assembly.
3. Install Vise Grip pliers on armature shaft.
4. Carefully install frame assembly over armature.
5. Position harness retainer hole over tab in end cap.
6. Secure frame assembly to end cap with 2 screws.
i e
f i
g
d
c
53776
a - Vise Grip Pliers
b - Armature Shaft
c - O-ring
d - End Cap
e - Harness Retainer
f - Retainer Hole
g - O-ring
h - Frame Assembly
i - Screws
c d
51433
a - Pump (Flat Towards Starboard Transom Bracket)
b - Flat - Faces Starboard Transom Bracket)
c - O-rings (4)
d - Drive Shaft (Install in Center Hole in Pump)
2. Fill pump with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid prior to installing motor.
3. Install motor, secure with two (2) screws. Route wiring; refer to Wiring Diagrams in this
service manual.
a
c c
53777
53782
a - Motor
b - O-ring
c - Screw (2) Tighten securely.
4. Complete reassembly of Power Trim System as outlined in “Installation” on page
5B-21.
Priming Power Trim System
1. Fill system with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid or Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) Type F,FA, Dexron II or Dexron III. Refer to “Fill, Check, and Purge” on
page 5B-10.
IMPORTANT: Run Trim System in short “jogs” until pump motor primes and trim
system moves. If trim motor is run without priming pump, drive shaft failure could
result.
Trim Sender Test
1. Check trim sender black lead for proper ground.
2. Trim outboard to full “DOWN” position.
3. Place ignition switch to “ON” position.
4. Disconnect BRN/WHT trim sender wire from trim sender harness.
5. Connect Ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) leads between outboard ground and Point 1 (trim
sender end).
6. Depress “UP” button. Ohmmeter needle should move as the outboard is trimmed up.
If needle does not move, trim sender is defective.
22908
a - Trim sender
c d
22744
a - Trim Sender
b - Screws, Loosen to Rotate Sender
c - Turn Sender Counterclockwise to raise needle reading
d - Turn Sender Clockwise to Lower Needle Reading
e - Tilt lock lever
d
e
22908
a - Trim Indicator
b - Remote Control
c - Trim Sender
d - Engine Ground
e - To Engine
f - Ignition Switch
g - Power Trim Harness
LOWER UNIT
Section 6A – Right Hand Non-Ratcheting
Table of Contents
Gear Housing Specifications (Standard Rotation) . 6A-1 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-25
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2 Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-5 Reassembly and Installation Standard Rotation . 6A-26
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation) . . 6A-6 Driveshaft Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation) . . . 6A-8 Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-27
General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-30
Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-31
– Standard Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11 Driveshaft and Pinion Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11 Pinion Gear Depth/Forward Gear
Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing Backlash/Reverse Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . 6A-34
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12 Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-13 Shift Shaft Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Removal . 6A-16 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-39
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-18 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-42
Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-20 Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 6A-45
Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-22 Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing 6A-45
Pinion Gear and Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-22 Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-46
6
Gear Housing Specifications (Standard Rotation) A
Forward Gear Reverse Gear
Ratio Pinion Depth
Backlash Backlash
0.025 in. (0.635 mm) 0.018 in. to 0.027 in.
With Tool 91-12349A2 (0.460 mm to 0.686 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
1.87:1
using Disc #2 and mm) Pointer on line (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Flat #7 mark #1
0.025 in. (0.635 mm) 0.015 in. to 0.022 in.
With Tool 91-12349A2 (0.38 mm to 0.56 mm) 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
2.0:1
using Disc #2 and Pointer on line mark (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Flat #7 #2
0.025 in. (0.635 mm) 0.018 in. to 0.023 in.
With Tool 91-12349A2 (0.46 mm to 0.58 mm) 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
2.3:1
using Disc #2 and Pointer on line mark (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Flat #7 #4
Special Tools
1. Shift Shaft Bushing Tool 91-31107
5. Bearing Removal and Installation Kit 91-31229A5. This kit contains the following
tools: Pilot 91-36571; Puller Rod 91-31229; Nut 11-24156; Puller Plate 91-29310;
Mandrel 91-38628; and Driver Rod 91-37323.
6. Pilot 91-36571
9. Mandrel 91-38628
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 - Adaptor (N.S.S.)
2 - Bearing (N.S.S.)
3 - Washer (N.S.S.)
4 - Spring (24-14111)
5 - Bolt (10-12580)
6 - Nut (11-13953)
7 - Set Screw (10-12575)
8 - Sleeve (23-13946)
Notes:
23
49
41 44
4.75 IN./120.65MM 46 45
TORPEDO DIA. 48 95
45 47
95
39 29
28
19
40 27
95
42 95
16
43 95
37
26 25
38 24
95 23
36
22
30
7
31
109 95
95
35
34
7 33 8 21
32 2
5 20
95 10
7
11 7
6 98
1918
10 4
12 33
3
95
9
13
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 14 1
15
19 Perfect Seal (92-34227-1)
109
23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 19
33 Loctite 680 (92-809833)
17
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
109 GM Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1)
4.75 IN./120.65MM
TORPEDO DIA.
To prevent corrosion damage after reassembly, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine
Lubricant to external surfaces of bearing carrier and cover nut threads prior to installation.
CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing BEFORE propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
2. Shift engine into neutral position.
3. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever.
4. Bend tabs of propeller tab washer away from thrust hub (rear), then remove propeller
locknut, tab washer, thrust hub (rear), propeller and thrust hub (forward) from propel-
ler shaft.
a d
f
d e
b
51871
51866
a - Thrust Hub (Forward)
b - Propeller Shaft
c - Continuity Washer (If Equipped)
d - Rear Thrust Hub
e - Tab Washer
f - Propeller Nut
5. Mark gear housing and trim tab so that trim tab can be reinstalled in the same position.
Remove plastic cap at rear edge of driveshaft housing, then unthread bolt that se-
cures trim tab and remove trim tab from gear housing.
6. Once trim tab is removed, remove bolt from inside of trim tab cavity.
a
b
51866
b
a
51879
a - Front Mounting Locknut
b - Side Mounting Locknut (One Each Side)
NOTE: Drain and Fill screws may be located on the starboard side of gearcase on later
models.
2. Position a clean drain pan under gear housing and remove “Fill” and “Vent” screws
from gear housing.
51871
a - “Fill” Screw
b - “Vent” Screw
3. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles. Presence of a small amount of fine metal
particles (resembling powder) indicates normal wear. Presence of larger particles (or
a large quantity of fine particles) indicates need for gear housing disassembly, and
component inspection.
4. Note the color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in
lubricant. Check drain pan for water separation from lubricant. Presence of water in
gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly, and inspection of oil seals, seal sur-
faces, O-rings and gear housing components.
NOTE: Gear lubricant drained from a recently run gear case will be a light chocolate
brown in color due to agitation/aeration. Oil which is stabilized will be a clear yellow brown
in color.
Water Pump
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean all water pump parts with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect water pump cover and base for cracks and distortion (from overheating).
3. Inspect face plate and water pump insert for grooves and/or rough surfaces.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repairs, that require removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary,
however, to re-use impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or prema-
ture impeller failure will occur.
4. Inspect impeller side seal surfaces and ends of impeller blades for cracks, tears and
wear. Replace impeller if any of these conditions are found.
5. Inspect impeller bonding to impeller hub.
6. Inspect impeller for glazed or melted appearance (caused by operation without suffi-
cient water supply). Replace impeller if any of these conditions exist.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
1. Slide rubber centrifugal slinger up and off driveshaft.
2. Remove water tube guide and seal from water pump cover. (Retain guide for reas-
sembly and discard seal.)
3. Remove (and retain) 3 nuts, one bolt and all washers which secure water pump cover
to gear housing.
4. Using 2 pry bars, lift water pump cover up and off driveshaft.
b
51874
c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolt and Washers To Be Removed
5. Inspect water pump cover and insert, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” pre-
vious.
6. If inspection of water pump insert determines that replacement is required, follow Step
“a” or “b” (immediately following) to remove insert from water pump cover.
NOTE: Try Step “a” first. If insert cannot be removed with Step “a,” use Step “b”.
a. Drive water pump insert out of water pump cover with a punch and hammer.
51874
b. Drill two 3/16 in. (4.8mm) diameter holes thru the top of water pump cover (but not
thru insert). Drive insert out of cover with a punch and hammer.
51873
a - Drill Two Holes at These Locations
7. Remove impeller from driveshaft. (It may be necessary to use a punch and hammer
to drive impeller upward on driveshaft. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to split
hub of impeller with a hammer and chisel.)
8. Once impeller is removed, remove impeller drive key from driveshaft.
9. Remove water pump face plate and both gaskets (one above and below face plate)
from water pump base.
10. Using 2 pry bars, positioned and padded as shown, lift water pump base up and off
driveshaft.
a
51874
a - Pads
11. Remove (and discard) O-ring from O-ring groove on water pump base.
12. Using a screwdriver, pry oil seals out of water pump base from gear housing side of
base.
a c b
51874
51865
a - Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107)
b - Punch
c - Tab of Tab Washer
4. Remove gear housing cover nut with Cover Nut Tool (91-61069).
51866
a - Cover Nut Tool (91-61069)
5. After cover nut has been removed, remove lock tab washer from gear housing.
CAUTION
Once bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken
not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may
break the neck of the clutch actuator rod.
6. Use long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) to remove bearing car-
rier. (Use propeller thrust hub to maintain outward pressure on puller jaws.)
NOTE: When bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, the bearing carrier alignment
key will come out with it.
7. With gear housing in NEUTRAL, pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If necessary, use
a pliers to pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If pliers are used to pull shift shaft out,
wrap a strip of soft metal (aluminum) around splines before clamping pliers. DO NOT
turn shaft (clockwise OR counterclockwise) while pulling shaft out. (For further infor-
mation on shift shaft, see “Shift Shaft Cleaning/lnspection and Disassembly.”)
d
a
b
51867
c
51867
a - Long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
b - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
c - Thrust Hub
d - Shift Shaft Bushing
e - Shift Shaft
CAUTION
Propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam, in most cases, will come out of gear
housing by simply pulling outward on propeller shaft. DO NOT FORCE shaft side-
ways or ATTEMPT TO PULL with a slide hammer or any mechanical puller.
8. Remove propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam by pulling shaft straight out of gear
housing. (DO NOT JERK propeller shaft.) If propeller shaft will not come out, proceed
with Step “a” or “b”, following:
a. Push propeller shaft back into place against the forward gear. Visually inspect lo-
cation of shift cam by looking down shift shaft hole (illuminated with a flashlight).
If splined hole in shift cam is visible, reinstall shift shaft and rotate shift shaft to neu-
tral position. Remove shift shaft, then remove propeller shaft as instructed in Step
8, immediately preceding.
b. Push propeller shaft back into place against forward gear. Slide bearing carrier
back into gear housing (to support propeller shaft). Place gear housing on its left
side (viewed from rear) and strike upper leading end of gear housing with a rubber
mallet. This will dislodge the shift cam from cam follower into a clearance pocket
in left side of gear housing. Remove bearing carrier and pull propeller shaft out
of gear housing.
NOTE: If Step 8-b was used to remove propeller shaft, the shift cam can be retrieved after
removal of forward gear.
Shift Shaft
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean shift shaft and bushing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check shift shaft splines on both ends for wear and/or corrosion damage.
3. Inspect shift shaft for groove(s) at shift shaft bushing seal surface.
4. Inspect shift shaft bushing for corrosion damage.
5. Inspect shift shaft bushing oil seal for wear and/or cuts.
NOTE: Oil seal in shift shaft bushing should be replaced as a normal repair procedure.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove (and discard) shift shaft bushing oil seal by prying it out or driving it out with
a punch and hammer.
CLEANING/INSPECTION - BEARING CARRIER
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and O-rings be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
1. Clean bearing carrier with solvent and dry with compressed air.
CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
2. Bearing carrier propeller shaft needle bearing condition is determined by propeller
shaft bearing surface condition. (See “Propeller Shaft Inspection.”)
3. Inspect reverse gear to pinion gear wear pattern (should be even and smooth). If not,
replace reverse gear and pinion gear.
4. Check clutch jaws on reverse gear for damage. Replace reverse gear, if damage is
found on clutch jaws.
5. Apply light oil to reverse gear bearing. Rotate reverse gear bearing while checking
bearing for rough spots and/or catches. Push in and pull out on reverse gear to check
for bearing side wear. Replace bearing if any of the listed conditions exist.
DISASSEMBLY - BEARING CARRIER
1. Remove and discard O-ring from between bearing carrier and thrust washer.
2. If inspection of reverse gear or reverse gear bearing determines that replacement of
gear or bearing is required, remove gear and bearing as follows:
a. Position bearing carrier in a soft jaw vise.
b. Use Slide Hammer (91-34569A1) and remove reverse gear.
51868
c. If reverse gear bearing remains attached to reverse gear, install Universal Puller
Plate (91-37241) and position puller plate, gear and bearing on a press with gear
side down. Use a suitable mandrel and press gear out of bearing.
a 51874
a - Universal Puller Plate
b - Mandrel
d. If reverse gear bearing has remained in bearing carrier, use slide hammer to re-
move bearing in the same methods as was used to remove reverse gear (Step
“b”).
3. Propeller shaft oil seals can be removed by (a) using a pry bar, or (b) pressing seals
out when propeller shaft needle bearing is pressed out of bearing carrier.
4. If inspection of propeller shaft needle bearing determines that replacement of bearing
is required, use Universal Bearing Removal and Installation Tool (91-31229A1) to
press bearing and seals out of bearing carrier.
NOTE: Reverse gear must be removed from bearing carrier before propeller shaft needle
bearing can be removed.
51868 51871
a - Pry Bar
b - Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing
c - Mandrel
d - Oil Seals
Propeller Shaft
INSPECTION
1. Clean propeller shaft assembly with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect bearing carrier oil seal surfaces for grooves. Run fingernail across seal sur-
face to check for groove. Replace shaft if groove is found.
3. Visually check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven
wear or discoloration (bluish color) from overheating. Replace shaft and correspond-
ing needle bearing if any of the above conditions are found. (Bearing carrier needle
bearing contacts propeller shaft just in front of oil seal surface. Forward gear bearing
contacts propeller shaft in front of sliding clutch splines.)
4. Inspect propeller shaft splines for wear and/or corrosion damage.
5. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Use either method, following:
BALANCE WHEELS
Place propeller shaft on balance wheels. Rotate propeller shaft and observe propeller end
of shaft for “wobble.” Replace shaft if any “wobble” is observed.
b b
a
c
51872
a - Balance Wheels
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Watch for Wobble
Position propeller shaft roller bearing surfaces on “vee” blocks. Mount a dial indicator at
front edge of propeller splines. Rotate propeller shaft. Dial indicator movement of more
than 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) (or noticeable “wobble”) is reason for replacement.
b b
c a
51872
a - “Vee” Blocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Measure with Dial Indicator at this Point
6. Inspect sliding clutch. Check reverse gear and forward gear clutch jaws. Rounded
jaws indicate one or more of the following:
a. Improper shift cable adjustment.
b. Improper shift habits of operator(s) (shift from NEUTRAL to REVERSE gear too
slowly).
c. Engine idle speed too high (while shifting).
a
51865
a - Clutch Jaws
7. Check condition of cam follower. If it shows wear (pitting, scoring or rough surface),
replace cam follower and shift cam.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove shift cam from cam follower.
2. Insert a thin blade screwdriver or awl under first coil of cross pin retainer spring and
rotate propeller shaft to unwind spring from sliding clutch. DO NOT over-stretch
spring.
CAUTION
Detent pin is free and can fall out of sliding clutch. Care MUST BE taken not to lose
pin.
3. Detent pin is free and can be removed from sliding clutch at this time.
b
c
d
a
51864 e 51864
a - Awl
b - Cross Pin Retainer Spring
c - Detent Pin
d - Cross Pin
e - Sliding Clutch
4. Push cross pin out of sliding clutch and propeller shaft with Cross Pin Tool (91-86642).
5. Pull sliding clutch off propeller shaft.
6. Pull cam follower and clutch actuator rod out of propeller shaft. DO NOT force cam
follower up-or-down or side-to-side when pulling from propeller shaft.
c d e
51864
b
51864
a - Cross Pin Tool (91-86642)
b - Cross Pin
c - Cam Follower
d - Clutch Actuator Rod
e - Propeller Shaft
7. Once cam follower and clutch actuator rod are removed from propeller shaft, lift rod
out of cam follower.
Clutch Actuator Rod
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean clutch actuator rod in solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect actuator components for wear or damage. Replace components as required.
Pinion Gear and Driveshaft
REMOVAL
1. Remove bearing retainer using Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506).
a
51865
a - Bearing Retainer
b - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506)
5. Remove gear housing from vise and re-position it as shown. Be sure to use soft jaw
vise covers and clamp as close as possible to water pump studs.
6. Place a block of wood on gear housing mating surface. Use a mallet and carefully tap
gear housing away from driveshaft.
CAUTION
DO NOT strike gear housing hard with the mallet or allow gear housing to fall.
b a
51870
a - Wooden Block
b - Soft Jaw Vise Covers
7. Reach into gear housing and remove pinion gear and forward gear assembly.
8. After driveshaft is removed from gear case, remove and retain shim(s) that were lo-
cated under upper tapered driveshaft bearing.
9. If inspection determines that replacement of driveshaft tapered bearing is required,
remove bearing from driveshaft as follows:
a. Position driveshaft in a vise; DO NOT tighten vise jaws against shaft.
b. Strike shaft with a lead hammer; take care not to drop shaft.
51866
10. Remove 18 loose needles from outer race of driveshaft needle bearing.
11. If inspection of driveshaft needle bearing surface determines that replacement of
needle bearing is required, the 18 loose needle bearings previously removed must
be reinstalled in bearing race to provide surface for mandrel to drive against.
NOTE: FORWARD gear must be removed first BEFORE removing driveshaft needle
bearing.
IMPORTANT: Discard driveshaft needle bearing after removal. (Bearing cannot be
reused.)
51869
a - Mandrel (91-37263)
b - Pilot* (91-36571)
c - Driver Rod* (91-37323)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
Forward Gear
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Forward gear can only be removed from gear housing after driveshaft and pinion
gear have been removed.
1. Reach into gear housing and lift out forward gear.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove tapered bearing or needle bearings from forward
gear, unless replacement of bearings is required. (Bearings cannot be reused after
they have been removed.)
2. If inspection determines that replacement of forward gear tapered bearing is required,
remove bearing from gear and bearing race from gear housing (tapered bearing and
race MUST BE replaced as a set), as follows:
a. Install Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) between forward gear and tapered bear-
ing.
b. Place forward gear, bearing and puller plate on a press and press gear out of bear-
ing with a suitable mandrel.
c. Use Slide Hammer (91-34569A1) to remove forward gear tapered bearing race.
b c
a
51870 51865
d
a - Universal Puller Plate
b - Mandrel
c - Slide Hammer
d - Tapered Bearing Race
d. After forward gear tapered bearing race is removed from gear housing, lift out and
retain shims which were behind bearing race.
3. If inspection determines that replacement of propeller shaft needle bearings in for-
ward gear is required, remove bearing from gear as follows:
a. Clamp forward gear in a soft jaw vise securely.
b. From toothed-side of gear, drive propeller shaft needle bearings out of gear with
a punch and hammer.
CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
1. Clean forward gear and bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect gear teeth for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and for discoloration
(from overheating). Replace gear if any of these conditions are found.
3. Check clutch jaws on forward gear for damage. Replace forward gear if damage is
found.
4. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discolor-
ation (from overheating). Replace tapered bearing (on forward gear) and race if any
of these conditions are found. (Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.)
5. To determine condition of propeller shaft needle bearings (in forward gear), inspect
propeller shaft forward gear needle bearing surface as outlined in “Propeller Shaft
Inspection.”
Gear Housing
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean gear housing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check gear housing carefully for impact damage.
3. Check for loose fitting bearing cups and needle bearings.
4. Inspect bearing carrier cover nut retainer threads in gear housing for corrosion dam-
age and/or stripped threads.
CAUTION
If driveshaft needle bearing failure has occurred, and original bearing race has
turned in the gear housing, gear housing MUST be replaced. Loose fitting needle
bearing will move out of position and cause repeated failures.
1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant to driveshaft needle bearing
bore in gear housing.
2. By way of propeller shaft cavity, place needle bearing in driveshaft bore with num-
bered side of bearing facing up driveshaft bore.
3. Install and seat needle bearing with the following tools: Puller Rod* (91-31229), Nut*
(11-24156), Pilot* (91-36571), Plate* (91-29310), and Mandrel (models with pre-
loaded driveshaft use 91-38628*; models with standard driveshaft use 91-92788).
Pull bearing up into bore until it bottoms on gear housing shoulder. (DO NOT use ex-
cessive force.)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
a
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Bearing
c - Pilot
d - Plate
e - Puller Rod
f - Hold
Bearing Carrier
REASSEMBLY
1. Place reverse gear on a press with gear teeth facing down.
IMPORTANT: The reverse gear thrust washer has a tapered outside diameter so
that one side is larger than the other. The larger outside diameter of washer must
be toward reverse gear.
2. Place thrust washer over gear with the larger outside diameter down toward gear.
3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto inside diameter of
reverse gear ball bearing.
4. Position ball bearing over gear (with numbered side of bearing up).
5. Press ball bearing onto gear with a suitable mandrel until firmly seated. (Be sure to
press only on inner race of bearing and that bearing is firm against gear.)
6. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto outside diameter of
propeller shaft needle bearing.
7. Place propeller shaft needle bearing into aft end of bearing carrier with numbered side
toward aft end.
8. Use Mandrel 91-15755 and press needle bearing into bearing carrier.
a
c
51873
51872
a - Thrust Washer
b - Mandrel
c - Mandrel (91-15755)
51872
a - Oil Seal (Lip of Seal Down)
b - Oil Seal Driver
c - Seated
11. Place second seal on short shoulder side of seal driver with lip of seal toward shoulder.
Press seal into bearing carrier until seal driver bottoms against bearing carrier.
a
c
51872
a - Oil Seal (Lip of Seal Up)
b - Oil Seal Driver
c - Seated
51870
a - Mandrel
b - Seated
15. Place O-ring over bearing carrier and position it between bearing carrier and thrust
washer.
16. Lubricate oil seals and O-ring with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
Forward Gear
REASSEMBLY
1. Place forward gear on a press with gear teeth down.
2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto the inside diameter
of forward gear tapered bearing.
3. Position forward gear tapered bearing over gear.
4. Press bearing onto gear until firmly seated. (Be sure to press only on inner race of
bearing and that bearing is firm against the gear.)
a
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Wooden Block
5. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to bore in center of forward
gear.
6. Place one forward gear needle bearing on longer shoulder side of Forward Gear Bear-
ing Tool (91-86943) with numbered side of bearing toward shoulder. Press bearing
into forward gear until bearing tool bottoms against gear.
a
b
51873
a - Forward Gear Bearing Tool (91-86943)
b - Numbered Side of Needle Bearing
7. Place second needle bearing on short shoulder side of bearing tool with numbered
side of bearing toward shoulder. Press bearing into forward gear until bearing tool bot-
toms against gear.
a 51867
a - Tapered Bearing Race
b - Bearing Driver Cup (91-31106)
c - Shim(s)
9. Remove nut from propeller shaft, then remove bearing carrier and propeller shaft from
gear housing. Lift bearing driver cup out of gear housing.
10. Apply a light coat of oil on tapered bearing race, then place forward gear assembly
into forward bearing race.
c
d
e
5. Position pinion gear in gear housing below driveshaft bore with teeth of pinion gear
meshed with teeth of reverse gear.
6. Insert driveshaft into driveshaft bore while holding pinion gear. Rotate driveshaft to
align and engage driveshaft splines with pinion gear splines. Continue to insert drive-
shaft into gear housing until driveshaft tapered bearing is against bearing race.
NOTE: It is recommended that after final pinion depth is obtained, a new pinion nut be
installed. Clean pinion nut threads with Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824) before applying
Loctite 271.
7. Place a small amount of Loctite 271 onto threads of pinion gear nut and install flat
washer and nut on driveshaft with flat side of nut away from pinion gear. Hand tighten
pinion nut.
8. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or
are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).
i
b c
h
d g
e 51867 f 51880
a - Driveshaft (rotate to engage splines with pinion gear)
b - Forward Gear Assembly
c - Pinion Gear
d - Washer (located above pinion nut)
e - Pinion Nut (apply Loctite 271 on threads and install with flat side away from
pinion gear)
f - Shim(s)
g - Bearing Race
h - Bearing Retainer (Word “OFF” must be visible) Torque to 100 lb. ft.
(135.5 Nm)
i - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506)
10. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut (pad area where flex handle will con-
tact gear housing while torquing nut).
11. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) or (91-90094) over crankshaft end of
driveshaft. Torque pinion nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm).
c
b a
d
a - Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1)
b - Torque Wrench; Torque Nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm)
c - Socket
d - Breaker Bar
IMPORTANT: Wipe any excess Loctite from pinion nut and pinion gear.
g g
b
a
a - Adaptor
b - Bearing
c - Washer
d - Spring
e - Nut; thread nut all the way onto bolt
f - Bolt
g - Set Screw
h - Sleeve; Holes in sleeve must align with set screw
5. Measure distance (a) and increase that distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm) by turning bottom
nut away from top nut.
a b
c
51870
a - Distance
b - Adaptor
c - Ledge
c b
d
a
c
a
24643
a - Pinion Gear Tool (91-74776 or 91-12349A2)
b - Feeler Gauge
c - Obtain 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) Clearance between Shimming Tool and
Pinion Gear
d - Add or Subtract Shim(s) Here
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) should remain installed on driveshaft after
setting pinion gear depth as it is required to properly check forward gear and reverse gear
backlash.
DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH
IMPORTANT: Bearing carrier must be assembled to provide a pilot for propeller
shaft.
1. Insert propeller shaft into position in gear housing. (DO NOT place shift cam on pro-
peller shaft.)
2. Place bearing carrier into gear housing and thread cover nut tightly against bearing
carrier. (It is not necessary to torque cover nut against bearing carrier.)
3. Attach Bearing Carrier Removal Tool (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) onto
gear housing.
4. Torque puller bolt against propeller shaft to 45 Ib. in. (5 Nm). Turn driveshaft 10 revolu-
tions with the load applied to propeller shaft. This will seat forward gear bearing.
a d
b
c 51867
5. Fasten dial indicator to gear housing and Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) to drive-
shaft.
6. Recheck torque on puller bolt [45 Ib. in. (5 Nm)].
7. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear
ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on Backlash Indicator
Tool, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear) or on line marked “4” if gear ratio is
2.3:1 (13 teeth on pinion gear).
d
c
e a
b
51880
a - Thread Stud Adaptor (from 91-14311A1)
b - Stud
c - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
d - Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
5. Secure pipe against carrier with propeller nut and tab washer.
b a
51866
a - Pipe [6 in. x 1.5 in. (152.5 mm x 38.0 mm)]
b - Propeller Nut
c - Tab Washer
a - Actuator Rod
b - Cam Follower
Propeller Shaft
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Insert clutch actuator rod assembly into end of propeller shaft. Align cross pin slot in
actuator rod with cross pin slot in propeller shaft.
2. On PRODUCTION MODEL GEAR CASES, position sliding clutch onto propeller shaft
with GROOVED RINGS (ON SLIDING CLUTCH) TOWARD PROPELLER END OF
PROPELLER SHAFT. Cross pin hole and detent holes (in sliding clutch) must line up
with cross pin slot and detent notches on propeller shaft.
d g h
e
f
a 51864
b c
51864
a - Cam Follower
b - Propeller Shaft
c - Sliding Clutch
d - Grooved Rings
e - Cross Pin Hole
f - Detent Hole (Behind Finger and Thumb)
g - Detent Notch (One on Each Side)
h - Cross Pin Slot
3. Insert cross pin thru sliding clutch, propeller shaft and actuator rod, forcing cross pin
tool out.
4. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on detent pin. Position a det-
ent pin in detent pin hole of sliding clutch with rounded end of pin toward propeller
shaft.
b
c
51864 d 51864
a - Cross Pin
b - Detent Pin
c - Cross Pin
d - Sliding Clutch
b a
c
55095 e d
51864
a - Cam Pocket
b - Cam Follower
c - Shift Cam
d - Shift Cam (Position as Shown)
e - Gear Housing
CAUTION
Until bearing carrier is installed into gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken
not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may
break the neck of the clutch actuator rod.
11. Insert shift shaft down shift shaft hole (of gear housing) and thru shift cam and cam
follower. (It may be necessary to rotate shift shaft back-and-forth slightly for it to enter
shift cam.)
12. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to threads of shift
shaft bushing. (Thread bushing into position, but do not tighten down at this time)
51867
a - Shift Shaft Bushing
b - Shift Shaft
13. Lubricate O-ring on bearing carrier with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
14. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to outside diameter
of bearing carrier (where carrier contacts gear housing).
NOTE: When performing Step 15, rotate driveshaft clockwise (viewed from top) to mesh
pinion gear with reverse gear.
15. Position bearing carrier over propeller shaft and slide it into gear housing. (Be sure
to align bearing carrier keyway with gear housing keyway.)
16. Push bearing carrier in as far as possible by hand, then install bearing carrier key.
17. Place tab washer against bearing carrier.
18. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to threads of cover nut and install
cover nut in gear housing (verify that the word “OFF” and arrow are visible).
19. Start cover nut a few turns by hand, then using Cover Nut Tool (91-61069) and torque
wrench, torque cover nut to 210 Ib. ft. (285 Nm).
a
b
c
51871
a - O-ring
b - Cover Nut Tool
c - Torque Wrench
20. Bend one lock tab of tab washer into cover nut (only one will align).
21. Bend remaining tabs of tab washer toward front of gear housing.
22. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) and torque shift shaft bushing to 30 Ib. ft.
(41 Nm).
Water Pump
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Install oil seals into water pump base, as follows:
a. Place water pump base on a press.
b. Just before installing each seal apply Loctite 271 on outside diameter of oil seal.
c. With a suitable mandrel, press the smaller diameter oil seal into pump base with
lip of oil seal toward impeller side of base.
d. With a suitable mandrel, press the larger diameter oil seal into pump base with lip
of oil seal toward gear housing side of base.
e. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seals and water pump base.
2. Install O-ring into O-ring groove of water pump base. Lubricate O-ring and oil seals
with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12).
c
b
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Oil Seal (Smaller OD)
c - O-ring Groove
3. Install divider block if removed. Use RTV Sealer to seal seams between divider block
and gear housing.
4. Install a new water pump base gasket and install water pump base.
b c
51866
51870
a - Divider Block
b - Water Pump Base
c - Gasket
d - Hole (MUST be positioned as shown)
5. Install the following in order: Pump base to face plate gasket, face plate gasket and
face plate to pump cover gasket. Gaskets and face plate are indexed by dowel pin
location and must be installed correctly.
b
c
51868
a - Gasket (Water Pump Base to Face Plate)
b - Face Plate
c - Gasket (Face Plate to Water Pump Cover)
6. Place impeller drive key on flat of driveshaft. Hold key on driveshaft with a small
amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repair, that requires removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary,
however, to reuse the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or pre-
mature impeller failure will occur. Original rotation is clockwise.
CAUTION
A visual inspection of impeller drive key MUST BE made to determine that drive
key is on flat of driveshaft after impeller is installed. If key has moved off flat of
driveshaft, repeat Steps 7 and 8.
7. Slide impeller down driveshaft to impeller drive key. Align drive key with keyway in the
center hub of impeller, and slide impeller over drive key.
8. If removed, install new water pump insert into pump cover as follows:
a. Apply Perfect Seal to water pump insert area of pump cover.
b. Install water pump insert into pump cover. Verify that tab on insert enters recess
in pump cover.
c. Wipe any excess Perfect Seal from insert and cover.
NOTE: If 2 holes were drilled in top of water pump cover to aid in removal of insert, fill holes
with RTV Sealer or equivalent. Allow to cure, 24 hours prior to operating engine.
9. Install water tube seal into pump cover, being sure that plastic side of seal goes into
cover first.
10. Reinstall water tube guide into water pump cover.
11. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant inside of water pump
insert.
12. Position assembled water pump cover over driveshaft and lower over water pump
studs. Rotate driveshaft in a clockwise direction (viewed from top), while pushing
down on pump cover to ease impeller entry into cover.
13. Install water pump cover retainer washers, nuts and bolt.
CAUTION
DO NOT over-torque nuts and bolt, as this could cause cover to crack during op-
eration.
14. Torque water pump nuts to 50 Ib. in. (5.5 Nm), and water pump bolt to 35 Ib. in. (4 Nm).
15. Install centrifugal slinger over driveshaft and down against pump cover.
c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolts and Washers
CAUTION
DO NOT allow lubricant on top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in
clearance space, will not allow driveshaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subse-
quently, tightening the gear housing nuts (while excess lubricant is on top of dri-
veshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the power-
head and gear housing. Top of driveshaft is to be wiped free of lubricant.
3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto shift shaft
splines. (DO NOT allow lubricant on top of shift shaft.)
4. Apply a thin bead of G.E. Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1) against the top of divider block.
5. Insert trim tab bolt into hole in rear of gear housing to driveshaft housing machined
surface.
6. Shift gear housing into forward gear and place guide block anchor pin into forward
gear position.
a
51900
a - Guide Block Anchor Pin
7. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing.
NOTE: If, while performing Step 8, the driveshaft splines will not align with crankshaft
splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear
housing is being pushed toward driveshaft housing.
8. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing, while aligning shift shaft splines and
water tube with water tube guide (in water pump cover).
9. Place flat washers onto studs (located on either side of driveshaft housing). Start a
nut on these studs and tighten finger-tight.
10. Start bolt at rear of gear housing inside trim tab recess. DO NOT tighten bolt at this
time.
11. Recheck shift shaft spline engagement and correct if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not force gearcase up into place with attaching nuts.
12. Evenly tighten 2 nuts which were started in Step 9. Torque to listing in “Torque Speci-
fications,” preceding.
13. After 2 nuts (located on either side of driveshaft housing) are tightened, check shift
operation as follows:
a. Place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position. Rotate flywheel clockwise
(viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate clockwise.
b. Place guide block anchor pin into neutral position. Propeller shaft should rotate
freely clockwise/counterclockwise.
c. Place guide block anchor pin into reverse gear position. Rotate flywheel clockwise
(viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate counterclockwise.
IMPORTANT: lf shifting operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing
must be removed and the cause corrected.
14. Install washers and nuts onto studs (located on bottom center of anti-cavitation plate).
Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
15. Install special flat washer and nut on stud at leading edge of driveshaft housing.
Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
16. Torque bolt (started in Step 10) to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
17. Install trim tab, adjust to position in which it had previously been installed, and tighten
securely.
18. Install plastic cap into trim tab bolt opening at rear edge of driveshaft housing.
Propeller Installation
WARNING
When installing or removing propeller, because of the engine’s ease in starting,
be sure that the remote control is in neutral position and that the key switch is
“OFF.” Place a block of wood between the anti-cavitation plate and propeller to
prevent accidental starting and to protect hands from propeller blades while re-
moving or installing nut.
1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat the propeller shaft splines with
one of the following Quicksilver products:
-- Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6)
-- Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1)
-- 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12)
-- Perfect Seal (92-34227--1)
2. Place forward thrust hub over propeller shaft with shoulder side toward propeller.
3. Place propeller on propeller shaft and slide it up against thrust hub.
51866
a - Forward Thrust Hub
b - Propeller Shaft
4. Place continuity washer (if equipped) onto shoulder of rear thrust hub.
5. Place rear thrust hub, tab washer and propeller nut on propeller shaft.
6. Thread propeller nut onto propeller shaft until nut is recessed into tab washer.
7. After propeller nut is recessed into tab washer, tighten nut securely [minimum of 55
Ib. ft. (74.5 Nm) torque].
8. Bend 3 of the tabs of tab washer down in grooves of rear thrust hub to secure propeller
nut. (If tab washer tabs do not align with slots, continue to tighten propeller nut to ob-
tain alignment. DO NOT loosen nut to align tabs.)
CAUTION
DO NOT misinterpret propeller shaft movement with propeller movement. If pro-
peller and propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft, this is normal; how-
ever, propeller should not move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft.
9. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer (Steps 7 and
8, preceding). Propeller should be checked periodically for tightness, particularly if a
stainless steel propeller is used.
a b
c
51866
a - Continuity Washer (if Equipped)
b - Rear Thrust Hub
c - Tab Washer
d - Propeller Nut
LOWER UNIT
Section 6B – Left Hand Non-Ratcheting
Table of Contents
Gear Housing Specifications (Counter Rotation) . . 6B-1 Reassembly and Installation of Counter Rotation
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2 Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation) . . . 6B-6 Driveshaft Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) . . . . 6B-8 Bearing Carrier, Forward Gear and Bearing
General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-11 Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-32
Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection of Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor Assembly . . . 6B-35
Counter Rotation (Left Hand) Gear Housing . . . . 6B-12 Driveshaft and Pinion Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-37
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-15 Pinion Gear Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-39
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . 6B-17 Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-41
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-19 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-42
Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-21 Propeller Shaft/Forward Gear Bearing
Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-24 Adapter/Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-45
Forward Gear and Bearing Adapter . . . . . . . . . 6B-24 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-52
Pinion Gear and Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-26 Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 6B-55
Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-28 Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing 6B-55
Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-30 Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-56
Special Tools
1. Shift Shaft Bushing Tool 91-31107T
5. Bearing Removal and Installation Kit 91-31229A5. This kit contains the following
tools: Pilot 91-36571; Puller Rod 91-31229; Nut 11-24156; Puller Plate 91-29310;
Mandrel 91-38628; and Driver Rod 91-37323.
6. Pilot 91-36571
9. Mandrel 91-38628
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 - Adaptor (N.S.S.)
2 - Bearing (N.S.S.)
3 - Washer (N.S.S.)
4 - Spring (24-14111)
5 - Bolt (10-12580)
6 - Nut (11-13953)
7 - Set Screw (10-12575)
8 - Sleeve (23-13946)
25. Reverse Gear Installation Kit 91-18605A1 includes Pilot 91-18603; Retainer
91-18604; Shaft 91-18605 and Screw 10-18602
d a
a - Pilot 91-18603
b - Shaft 91-18605
c - Retainer 91-18604
d - Screw 10-18602
37
25
26
38 24
95
23
36
22
30
7
31
109 95 95
35
34
7 33 8 21
32 2
5 20
95 10
7
11 7
98
50 6
1918
10 4
12 33
3
95
9
13
14
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820) 1
15
19 Perfect Seal (92-34227-1) 7
23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 19
33 Loctite 680 (92-809833) 17
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
109 GM Silicone Sealer (92-91600-1)
86
95
87
84 88
52
87
51
53
87 58
54
66
60 65
95
55 87
64 56
63
57 87 94
87 69
87
67
61 59 68
62 70
95
71
87 76
72
73 87
87 7
74 77
75 95 78
74 79
80 82
73 95
72
81
83
95
85
4.75 IN./120.65 MM
TORPEDO DIA.
86
95
87
84
88
52
87
51
53
58
87 54
66
60 65
95
55 87
64 56
63
57 87 94
87 69
67
87
61 59 68
62 70
95
71
87 76
72
73 87
87 7
77
74
75 95 78
74 79
80 82
73 95
72
81
83
95
BEARINGS
Upon disassembly of gear housing, all bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean
bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing
so that it passes thru the bearing. DO NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may
cause bearing to score from lack of lubrication. After cleaning, lubricate bearings with
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubricate tapered bearing cups until after inspection.
Inspect all bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bear-
ing race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting ta-
pered bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bear-
ing cup for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or
discoloration from over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the bearing surface of the shaft that
the roller bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting, scoring, grooving, imbedded
particles, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must
be replaced, if the conditions described are found.
SHIMS
Keep a record of all shim amounts and location during disassembly to aid in reassembly.
Be sure to follow shimming instructions during reassembly, as gears must be installed to
correct depth and have the correct amount of backlash to avoid noisy operation and pre-
mature gear failure.
SEALS
As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals SHOULD BE REPLACED without regard
to appearance. To prevent leakage around oil seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter
of all metal case oil seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean
and dry. To ease installation, apply 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on all O-rings. To pre-
vent wear, apply 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on l.D. of oil seals. To prevent corrosion
damage after reassembly, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon to external surfaces of bear-
ing carrier and cover nut threads prior to installation.
WARNING
Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from
engine before removing gear housing from driveshaft housing.
1. Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine.
CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing BEFORE propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
2. Shift engine into NEUTRAL position.
3. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever.
4. Bend tabs of propeller tab washer away from thrust hub (rear), then remove propeller
locknut, tab washer, thrust hub (rear), propeller and thrust hub (forward) from propel-
ler shaft.
c
a
f
b
d 51916
51912
a - Thrust Hub (Forward)
b - Propeller Shaft
c - Continuity Washer (If Equipped)
d - Rear Thrust Hub
e - Tab Washer
f - Propeller Nut
5. Mark gear housing and trim tab so that trim tab can be reinstalled in the same position.
Remove plastic cap at rear edge of driveshaft housing. Remove bolt that secures trim
tab and remove tab from gear housing.
6. Once trim tab is removed, remove bolt from inside of trim tab cavity.
7. Remove 2 locknuts from bottom middle of anti-cavitation plate.
a
b
51866
a - Bolt (Secures Trim Tab)
b - Bolt (Inside Trim Tab Cavity)
c - Locknuts and Washers
b
a
51873
a - Front Mounting Locknut
b - Side Mounting Locknut (One Each Side)
10. Pull gear housing away from driveshaft housing as far as the loosened nuts (in Step
9) will allow, then remove loosened nuts. (DO NOT allow gear housing to fall, as it now
is free.)
11. Pull gear housing from driveshaft housing.
DRAINING AND INSPECTING GEAR HOUSING LUBRICANT
1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with the driveshaft in a vertical
position, as shown.
NOTE: Drain and Fill screws may be located on the starboard side of gearcase on later
models.
2. Position a clean drain pan under gear housing and remove “Fill” and “Vent” screws
from gear housing.
3. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles. Presence of a small amount of fine metal
particles (resembling powder) indicates normal wear. Presence of larger particles (or
a large quantity of fine particles) indicates need for gear housing disassembly, and
component inspection.
4. Note the color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in
lubricant. Check drain pan for water separation from lubricant. Presence of water in
gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly, and inspection of oil seals, seal sur-
faces, O-rings and gear housing components.
IMPORTANT: Gear lubricant drained from a recently run gear case will be a light
chocolate brown in color due to agitation/aeration. Oil which is stabilized will be
a clear yellow brown in color.
a
51871
a - Fill Screw
b - Vent Screw
Water Pump
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean all water pump parts with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect water pump cover and base for cracks and distortion (from overheating).
3. Inspect face plate and water pump insert for grooves and/or rough surfaces.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repairs, that require removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary,
however, to re-use impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or prema-
ture impeller failure will occur.
4. Inspect impeller side seal surfaces and ends of impeller blades for cracks, tears and
wear. Replace impeller if any of these conditions are found.
5. Inspect impeller bonding to impeller hub.
6. Inspect impeller for glazed or melted appearance (caused by operation without suffi-
cient water supply). Replace impeller if any of these conditions exist.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
1. Slide rubber centrifugal slinger up and off driveshaft.
2. Remove water tube guide and seal from water pump cover. (Retain guide for reas-
sembly and discard seal.)
3. Remove (and retain) 3 nuts, one bolt and all washers which secure water pump cover
to gear housing.
4. Using 2 pry bars, lift water pump cover up and off driveshaft.
51874
c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolt and Washers to be Removed
5. Inspect water pump cover and insert, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” pre-
vious.
6. If inspection of water pump insert determines that replacement is required, follow Step
“a” or “b” (immediately following) to remove insert from water pump cover.
NOTE: Try Step “a” first. If insert cannot be removed with Step “a,” use Step “b.”
a. Drive water pump insert out of water pump cover with a punch and hammer.
b. Drill two 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) diameter holes thru the top of water pump cover (but
not thru insert). Drive insert out of cover with a punch and hammer.
51874
51873
a - Drill Two Holes at These Locations
7. Remove impeller from driveshaft. (It may be necessary to use a punch and hammer
to drive impeller upward on driveshaft. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to split
hub of impeller with a hammer and chisel.)
8. Once impeller is removed, remove impeller drive key from driveshaft.
9. Remove water pump face plate and both gaskets (one above and below face plate)
from water pump base.
10. Using 2 pry bars, positioned and padded as shown, lift water pump base up and off
driveshaft.
a
51874
a - Pads
11. Remove (and discard) O-ring from O-ring groove on water pump base.
12. Using a screwdriver, pry oil seals out of water pump base from gear housing side of
base.
CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in neutral position, and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing before propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with propeller shaft in a horizon-
tal position.
2. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) to unthread shift shaft bushing. (DO NOT re-
move bushing from shift shaft at this time.)
3. Bend retainer nut lock tab out of retainer nut recess.
b
d c
51882 51865
a - Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107)
b - Shift Shaft Bushing
c - Punch
d - Tab of Tab Washer
4. Remove gear housing retainer nut with Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069).
5. After retainer nut has been removed, remove lock tab washer from gear housing.
a b
51911 51885
a - Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069)
b - Retainer Nut
c - Tab Washer
CAUTION
Once bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken
not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may
break the neck of the clutch actuator rod.
6. Use long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) to remove bearing car-
rier. (Use propeller thrust hub to maintain outward pressure on puller jaws.)
NOTE: When bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, the bearing carrier alignment
key will come out with it.
a
b
c 51867
a - Long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
b - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
c - Thrust Hub
IMPORTANT: Prior to removal of shift shaft from gear housing, recheck that gear
housing is in neutral position.
7. With gear housing in neutral, pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If necessary, use a
pliers to pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If pliers are used to pull shift shaft out, wrap
a strip of soft metal (aluminum) around splines before clamping pliers. DO NOT turn
shaft (clockwise OR counterclockwise) while pulling shaft out. (For further information
on shift shaft, see “Shift Shaft Cleaning/lnspection and Disassembly.”)
51867
a - Shift Shaft Bushing
b - Shift Shaft
CAUTION
Propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam, in most cases, will come out of gear
housing by simply pulling outward on propeller shaft. DO NOT FORCE shaft side-
ways or ATTEMPT TO PULL with a slide hammer or any mechanical puller.
8. Remove propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam by pulling shaft straight out of gear
housing. (DO NOT JERK propeller shaft.)
NOTE: Sliding clutch, forward gear assembly, bearing adaptor, thrust washer and thrust
bearings will be removed from gearcase with propeller shaft.
51877
9. If propeller shaft will not come out, proceed with Step “a” or “b,” following:
a. Push propeller shaft back into place against the reverse gear. Visually inspect lo-
cation of shift cam by looking down shift shaft hole (illuminated with a flashlight).
If splined hole in shift cam is visible, reinstall shift shaft and rotate shift shaft to neu-
tral position. Remove shift shaft, then remove propeller shaft as instructed in Step
8, immediately preceding.
b. Push propeller shaft back into place against reverse gear. Slide bearing
carrier back into gear housing (to support propeller shaft). Place gear hous-
ing on its left side (viewed from rear) and strike upper leading end of gear
housing with a rubber mallet. This will dislodge the shift cam from cam fol-
lower into a clearance pocket in left side of gear housing. Remove bearing
carrier and pull propeller shaft out of gear housing.
NOTE: If Step 9-b was used to remove propeller shaft, the shift cam can be retrieved after
removal of reverse gear.
Shift Shaft
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean shift shaft and bushing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check shift shaft splines on both ends for wear and/or corrosion damage.
3. Inspect shift shaft for groove(s) at shift shaft bushing seal surface.
4. Inspect shift shaft bushing for corrosion damage.
5. Inspect shift shaft bushing oil seal for wear and/or cuts.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove (and discard) shift shaft bushing oil seal by prying it out or driving it out with
a punch and hammer.
CLEANING/INSPECTION - BEARING CARRIER
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and O-rings be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
1. Clean bearing carrier with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Bearing carrier propeller shaft needle bearing condition is determined by propeller
shaft bearing surface condition. (See “Propeller Shaft Inspection.”)
DISASSEMBLY- BEARING CARRIER
1. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing carrier.
2. If thrust bearing, thrust washer or thrust bearing surface on propeller shaft shows
signs of rust, pitting or blueing from lack of lubricant, component(s) should be dis-
carded.
3. Remove bearing carrier oil seals.
a d
e
c b
f
g
51878
51886
a - Thrust Bearing
b - Thrust Washer
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Pry Bar
e - Oil Seals
f - Bearing Carrier
g - Bearing Carrier Needle Bearing
NOTE: Do not remove bearing carrier needle bearing unless replacement is needed.
4. Use bearing removal and replacement tool (91-31229A5) or equivalent to press bear-
ings out of bearing carrier.
b
51885
a - Needle Bearing
b - Push Rod
c - Mandrel
Propeller Shaft
INSPECTION
1. Clean propeller shaft assembly with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect bearing carrier oil seal surfaces for grooves. Run fingernail across seal sur-
face to check for groove. Replace shaft if groove is found.
3. Visually check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven
wear or discoloration (bluish color) from overheating. Replace shaft and correspond-
ing needle bearing if any of the above conditions are found. (Bearing carrier needle
bearing contacts propeller shaft just in front of oil seal surface. Reverse gear bearing
contacts propeller shaft in front of sliding clutch splines.)
4. Inspect propeller shaft splines for wear and/or corrosion damage.
5. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Use either method, following:
Balance Wheels
Place propeller shaft on balance wheels, as shown. Rotate propeller shaft and observe
propeller end of shaft for “wobble.” Replace shaft if any wobble is observed.
b
a
51877
a - Balance Wheels
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Watch for Wobble
51875
a - Cross Pin Retainer Spring
CAUTION
Detent pin is free and can fall out of sliding clutch. Care MUST BE taken not to lose
pin.
3. Detent pin is free and can be removed from sliding clutch at this time.
4. Push cross pin out of sliding clutch and propeller shaft with a punch.
c
d
b
e
51879
51875
a - Detent Pin
b - Cross Pin
c - Sliding Clutch
d - Cross Pin
e - Punch
b
a
51875
a - Sliding Clutch
b - Reverse Gear Clutch Jaws
c - Forward Gear Clutch Jaws
7. Pull cam follower and clutch actuator rod out of propeller shaft. DO NOT force cam
follower up-or-down or side-to-side when pulling from propeller shaft.
8. Once cam follower and clutch actuator rod are removed from propeller shaft, lift rod
out of cam follower.
9. Check condition of cam follower. If it shows wear (pitting, scoring or rough surface),
replace cam follower and shift cam.
10. Remove forward gear and bearing adaptor assembly.
11. Remove 2 thrust races and 2 keepers from prop shaft.
c e
f
d
a b 55097
51884
a - Cam Follower
b - Clutch Actuator Rod
c - Forward Gear
d - Bearing Adaptor Assembly
e - Thrust Races (2)
f - Keepers (hidden) (2)
b a
c
g
51878
a - Forward Gear
b - Forward Gear Clutch Teeth
c - Forward Gear Teeth
d - Forward Gear Hub
e - Thrust Bearing
f - Thrust Washer
g - Spacer Shim
6. Remove thrust washer and O-ring. The thrust washer acts as a bearing surface for
the thrust bearing and it should be inspected for pits, rust, scoring or discoloration due
to lack of lubricant. O-ring should be inspected for cuts or abrasions and replaced if
necessary.
7. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing adaptor. Thrust roller bearing
should be inspected for pitting, rust or signs of discoloration (blueing) due to lack of
lubricant. If thrust roller bearing must be replaced, the bearing surfaces on the thrust
washer and propeller shaft where the thrust roller bearing rides should also be in-
spected for signs of wear.
b e
55089
55090
a - Thrust Washer
b - O-Ring (hidden)
c - Thrust Bearing
d - Thrust Washer
e - Bearing Adaptor
8. The forward gear bearing should be carefully inspected for smoothness of movement,
pits, rust, or signs of discoloration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant. If the bearing must
be replaced, it is recommended that a hammer and cape chisel be used to break the
bearing loose from the bearing adapter. Be careful not to damage bearing adapter
when removing roller bearing.
a
b
55091
a - Forward Gear Bearing
b - Bearing Adaptor
a
51865
a - Bearing Retainer
b - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506)
CAUTION
DO NOT strike gear housing hard with the mallet or allow gear housing to fall.
b a
51878
a - Wooden Block
b - Soft Jaw Vise Covers
8. After driveshaft is removed from gear case, remove and retain shim(s) that were lo-
cated under upper tapered driveshaft bearing.
9. If inspection determines that replacement of driveshaft tapered bearing is required,
remove bearing from driveshaft as follows:
a. Position driveshaft in a vise; DO NOT tighten vise jaws against shaft.
b. Strike shaft with a lead hammer; take care not to drop shaft.
51866
10. Remove 18 loose needles from outer race of driveshaft needle bearing.
11. If inspection of driveshaft needle bearing surface determines that replacement of
needle bearing is required, the 18 loose needle bearings previously removed must
be reinstalled in bearing race to provide surface for mandrel to drive against.
NOTE: Reverse gear must be removed first before removing driveshaft needle bearing.
IMPORTANT: Discard driveshaft needle bearing after removal. (Bearing cannot be
reused.)
51869
a - Mandrel (91-37263)
b - Pilot* (91-36571)
c - Driver Rod* (91-37323)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
50884
a - Reverse Gear
IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove needle bearing from reverse gear unless replace-
ment of bearing is required. Bearing cannot be reused after it has been removed.
2. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from reverse gear bearing cup.
3. Remove reverse gear bearing adaptor. Remove, measure and make note of the shim
thickness and discard (DO NOT reuse) the shims.
d g f
e
i
b
c 50882
50780
a - Thrust Bearing
b - Thrust Washer
c - Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor
d - Bolt (91-31229)
e - Nut (91-11-24156)
f - Guide Plate (91-816243)
g - Washer (91-34961)
h - Puller Head (from Slide Hammer Puller Kit 91-34569A1)
i - Jaws (91-816242)
CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
1. Clean reverse gear and bearing with solvent and dry with compressed air. DO NOT
spin the bearing.
2. Inspect gear teeth for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and for discoloration
(from overheating). Replace gear if any of these conditions are found.
3. Check clutch jaws on reverse gear for damage. Replace reverse gear if damage is
found.
23351
a - Reverse Gear Teeth
b - Clutch Jaws
NOTE: The needle bearings in the reverse gear should not be removed unless damage
has been found. Inspect to ensure that all of the needles are present and in position.
Needles that have been dislodged may be snapped back into place as long as no damage
has occurred to the bearing cage.
4. Inspect the needle bearings on the inside of the reverse gear and the bearing surface
on the propeller shaft. If either the needle bearings or the bearing surface of the pro-
peller shaft is pitted grooved, worn unevenly, discolored from overheating or has em-
bedded particles, replace the propeller shaft and needle bearing in the reverse gear.
a
5. If reverse gear needle bearing is found to be damaged, place reverse gear in a press
and use mandrel 91-63569 to press bearing out of gear.
a
50778
a - Bearing
Gear Housing
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean gear housing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check gear housing carefully for impact damage.
3. Check for loose fitting bearing adaptors and needle bearings.
NOTE: If bearing adaptors have spun in gear case, gear housing must be replaced.
4. Inspect bearing carrier cover nut retainer threads in gear housing for corrosion dam-
age and/or stripped threads.
CAUTION
If driveshaft needle bearing failure has occurred, and original bearing race has
turned in the gear housing, gear housing must be replaced. Loose fitting needle
bearing will move out of position and cause repeated failures.
NOTE: Driveshaft needle bearing must be installed prior to installation of reverse gear.
1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant to driveshaft needle bearing
bore in gear housing.
2. By way of propeller shaft cavity, place needle bearing in driveshaft bore with num-
bered side of bearing facing up driveshaft bore.
3. Install and seat needle bearing with the following tools: Puller Rod* (91-31229), Nut*
(91-24156), Pilot* (91-36571), Plate* (91-29310), and Mandrel* (91-92788). Pull
bearing up into bore until it bottoms on gear housing shoulder. (DO NOT use exces-
sive force.)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
a
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Bearing
c - Pilot
d - Plate
e - Puller Rod
f - Hold
a
b
a - Suitable Mandrel
b - Forward Gear Bearing
c - Bearing Adaptor
a
d
c
b
51881
a - Mandrel (91-15755)
b - Bearing Carrier Needle Bearing
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Shoulder
3. With seal lip facing towards bearing, press inner seal using long end of mandrel
(91-31108) into bearing carrier until mandrel shoulder bottoms out on bearing carrier.
d
a
51881
a - Inner Seal
b - Mandrel (91-31108)
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Mandrel Shoulder
4. With seal lip facing towards mandrel, press outer seal using short end of mandrel
(91-31108) into bearing carrier until mandrel shoulder bottoms out on bearing carrier.
a d
51881
a - Outer Seal
b - Mandrel (91-31108)
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Mandrel Shoulder
5. Lubricate both seal lips with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12).
b
e
d
c
f
a g
51883
a - Reverse Gear Teeth
b - Mandrel (91-86943)
c - Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing
d - Shoulder
e - Mandrel
f - Bearing Cup Adapter
g - Reverse Gear Roller Bearing
IMPORTANT: The appearance of the forward and reverse gear is almost identical.
There are two ways to distinguish between the reverse and forward gears. The re-
verse gear has a shorter hub and it has a smaller inner diameter needle bearing
bore.
d
a b 50885
a - Reverse Gear
b - Forward Gear
c - Shorter Length Hub
d - Smaller Diameter Bearing Bore
(subtract) middle
of 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
specification:
You get: 0.020 in. (0.51 mm)
1. Lubricate the bore into which the reverse gear bearing adaptor is to be installed with
Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant.
2. Place the shim(s) into reverse bore of gear housing.
3. Position the bearing adaptor in the gear housing.
55099
a - Bearing Adaptor
b - Shims
4. Position the reverse gear (without the thrust race or thrust bearing) into the gear hous-
ing and into the adaptor.
5. Install PILOT RING (91-18603) over DRIVER TOOL (91-18605) and seat pilot ring in
gearcase against inner ledge. Thread RETAINER (91-18604) into bearing carrier
threads. Install SCREW (10-18602) into retainer and gently tighten screw against
driver tool while holding retainer securely. Continue to apply pressure against driver
rod until reverse gear/bearing cup adaptor JUST SEATS in gearcase. DO NOT
OVER-SEAT the adaptor as the reverse gear bearing will be damaged. As bearing
adaptor begins to seat, the effort required to turn screw will increase considerably.
e b
f c
d
55100
a - Reverse Gear
b - Pilot Ring (91-18603)
c - Driver Tool (91-18605)
d - Inner Ledge
e - Retainer (91-18604)
f - Screw (10-18602)
6. After reverse bearing adaptor is seated, remove screw, retainer, driver tool, pilot ring
and reverse gear. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to thrust bearing and
install thrust race and bearing onto bearing adaptor.
7. Reinstall reverse gear into bearing adaptor.
a
d
b f e
c
55101 g
55102
a - Thrust Bearing
b - Thrust Washer
c - Bearing Adaptor
d - Reverse Gear
e - Thrust Bearing
f - Thrust Washer (under thrust bearing)
g - Bearing Adaptor
c
d
e
50064
a - Used Pinion Nut
b - Driveshaft
c - Tapered Bearing
d - Old Bearing Inner Race
e - Universal Puller Plate
5. Position pinion gear in gear housing below driveshaft bore with teeth of pinion gear
meshed with teeth of reverse gear.
6. Insert driveshaft into driveshaft bore while holding pinion gear. Rotate driveshaft to
align and engage driveshaft splines with pinion gear splines. Continue to insert drive-
shaft into gear housing until driveshaft tapered bearing is against bearing race.
7. Apply Loctite 271 to threads of pinion gear nut and install flat washer and nut on drive-
shaft with flat side of nut away from pinion gear.
8. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or
are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).
b
a
51880
a - Shim(s)
b - Bearing Race
c - Bearing Retainer (Word “OFF” must be visible); Torque to 100 lb. ft.
(135.5 Nm)
d - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506)
10. Use a socket and breaker bar to hold pinion nut (pad area where flex handle will con-
tact gear housing while torquing nut).
11. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) over crankshaft end of driveshaft.
Torque pinion nut to 75 Ib. ft. (101.5 Nm).
c
b a
d
a - Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1)
b - Torque Wrench; Torque Nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm)
c - Socket
d - Breaker Bar
IMPORTANT: Wipe any excess Loctite from pinion nut and pinion gear.
g g
b
a
a - Adaptor
b - Bearing
c - Washer
d - Spring
e - Nut; thread nut all the way onto bolt
f - Bolt
g - Set Screw
h - Sleeve; holes in sleeve must align with set screws
5. Measure distance (a) and increase that distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm) by turning bottom
nut away from top nut.
a b
c
51870
a - Distance
b - Adaptor
c - Ledge
cc b
d
aa
cc
aa
24643
a - Pinion Gear Shimming Tool (91-74776 or 91-12349A2)
b - Feeler Gauge
c - Obtain 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) Clearance between Shimming Tool and Pinion
Gear
d - Add or Subtract Shim(s) Here
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) should remain installed on driveshaft after
setting pinion gear depth as it is required to properly check forward gear and reverse gear
backlash.
Reverse Gear
DETERMINING REVERSE GEAR BACKLASH
NOTE: Reverse gear backlash is adjustable using shims; it can be checked as follows:
1. Install Driver Tool (91-18605) into reverse gear assembly.
2. Slide Pilot Ring (91-18603) over driver tool and seat pilot ring against inner ledge in
gear case.
3. Thread Retainer (91-18604) into gear case cover nut threads.
4. Torque Screw (91-18602) to 45 Ib. in. (5 Nm) against driver tool.
d b
e a
c
51884
a - Driver Tool (91-18605)
b - Pilot Ring (91-18603)
c - Inner Ledge
d - Retainer (91-18604)
e - Screw (91-18602) [Torque to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm)]
5. Thread stud adapter [from Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1)] all the way onto stud.
6. Install: Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
7. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear
ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on Backlash Indicator
Tool, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear).
8. Lightly turn driveshaft back-and-forth (no movement should occur at propeller shaft).
9. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which should be 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
(0.76 mm to 1.27 mm).
d f
c
e
a
51880
a - Stud Adaptor (from 91-14311A1)
b - Stud
c - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
d - Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
f - Dial Indicator Pointer
NOTE: If reverse gear backlash is not within specifications, then gear case is not properly
assembled or component(s) within gear case are excessively worn and must be replaced
before returning gear case to service.
10. Remove Driver Tool, Pilot Ring, Retainer and Screw from gear case.
Forward Gear
DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH
1. Install a load washer (12-37429) over a 44-93003 propeller shaft so that it seats
against the REAR shoulder of the clutch spline teeth.
b
a c 55088
a - Load Washer (12-37429)
b - Shoulder
c - Propeller Shaft (44-93003)
h
a
f d b 55103 55104
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Bearing Adaptor
c - Thrust Washer
d - Thrust Bearing
e - Forward Gear
f - Shim (PLACE IN GEARCASE FIRST)
g - Shoulder
h - Shim
a d
f h
g
b c e
i j k 51882
7. Tighten nut to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm). This will seat the forward gear against the forward
thrust bearing and tends to hold the propeller shaft from moving when measuring
backlash.
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) should still be installed from having previous-
ly been used to determine pinion gear depth and reverse gear backlash. If it is not still
installed on gear case, refer to “DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH,” previously, for
proper installation procedure.
8. With the proper preload applied to the propeller shaft and the driveshaft, rotate the
driveshaft clockwise 5 to 10 complete revolutions. This will seat the forward gear and
upper driveshaft bearings and thus provide the most accurate backlash readings.
9. If not previously installed:
a. Thread stud adaptor [from bearing preload tool (91-44307A1)] all the way onto
stud.
b. Install: Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
10. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on BACKLASH INDICATOR TOOL,
if gear ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on BACKLASH
INDICATOR TOOL, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear).
d f
c
e
a
51880
a - Stud Adaptor (from 91-44307A1)
b - Stud
c - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
d - Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
f - Dial Indicator Pointer
11. Gently rock driveshaft back and forth to determine forward gear backlash.
175 and 200 HP models with 1.87:1 Ratio = 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.46 mm - 0.69 mm)
backlash.
135 and 150 HP models with 2.00:1 Ratio = 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm - 0.56 mm)
backlash.
12. If backlash is less than the specifications, then a larger shim should be installed. Con-
versely, if the backlash indicated is greater than specifications, then a smaller shim
should be installed.
NOTE: By adding or subtracting 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) shim, the backlash will change ap-
proximately 0.002 in. (0.051 mm).
51882
a - Shim
13. If forward gear backlash is within specifications, then Bearing Preload Tool, Dial Indi-
cator, Backlash Indicator Tool/Dial Indicator Holder, PVC pipe, forward gear assem-
bly, bearing adaptor, bearing carrier and test propeller shaft can all be removed from
the gear case.
Propeller Shaft/Forward Gear Bearing Adapter/Bearing Carrier
REASSEMBLY
1. Position sliding clutch onto propeller shaft. “GROOVED RINGS” are for manufactur-
ing purposes only and may be positioned towards either gear. Cross pin hole and det-
ent hole in sliding clutch must line up with cross pin slot and detent notch in propeller
shaft.
a
d f
b
e g
c 51913
a - Sliding Clutch
b - Propeller Shaft
c - Grooved Rings
d - Cross Pin Hole
e - Detent Hole
f - Cross Pin Slot
g - Detent Notches
2. Place a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant on actuator rod and
install cam follower.
b a
a - Actuator Rod
b - Cam Follower
3. Slide clutch actuator assembly into propeller shaft. Align cross pin slot in actuator rod
with cross pin slot in clutch/propeller shaft.
a b d c e
51875
a - Cam Follower
b - Clutch Actuator Rod
c - Propeller Shaft
d - Cross Pin Slot
e - Clutch/Propeller Shaft
4. Insert cross pin through sliding clutch, propeller shaft and actuator rod forcing cross
pin tool out.
a
51875
a - Cross Pin
51879
a - Detent Pin
b - Detent Pin Hole
c - Sliding Clutch
b a
c e d
55095 55096
a - Cam Pocket
b - Cam Follower
c - Shift Cam
d - Shift Cam (Position as Shown)
e - Gear Housing
11. Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to the threads of the shift shaft bushing.
12. Insert shift shaft down shift shaft hole in gear housing and into shift cam. It may be
necessary to rotate shift shaft back-and-forth slightly in order for splines of shift shaft
to match up with splines of shift cam. Thread bushing into position, but do not tighten
down at this time.
51867
a - Shift Shaft Bushing
b - Shift Shaft
a c
55220
50782
a - Shim
b - Bearing Adaptor
c - Thrust Washer
d - Thrust Bearing
15. Insert Forward Gear Installation Tool (91-815850) into forward gear/bearing adaptor
assembly.
16. Install tool with adaptor assembly over propeller shaft and into gear housing. Applying
downward pressure to bearing adaptor, remove installation tool from assembly.
55221
55202
a - Forward Gear Installation Tool (91-815850)
b - Forward Gear/Bearing Adaptor Assembly
c - Forward Gear Bearing Adaptor
55107 55108
a - Thrust Race
b - Thrust Bearing
19. Install thrust collar with its STEPPED SIDE DOWN toward the small thrust bearing.
20. Pull up slightly on the propeller shaft to gain access to the groove on the shaft for the
keepers. Install the 2 keepers into the groove and lower the propeller shaft.
a e
55109 55110
a - Thrust Collar
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Propeller Shaft
d - Keepers (2)
e - Thrust Collar
21. Install second thrust collar with its stepped side UP.
22. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to the second thrust bearing and install
it on top of the second thrust collar.
b
a
c
55112
a - Thrust Collar
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Thrust Collar
23. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to to second small thrust bearing race
and install race to the surface inside of the bearing carrier.
24. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to bearing carrier O-ring. Install
O-ring onto bearing adaptor.
b
50779 55113
a - Thrust Race
b - Bearing Carrier Race Surface
c - O-ring
b
a
51885
55114
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Tab Washer
30. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to threads of cover nut and install cover nut in gear housing.
Verify that the word “OFF” and arrow are visible.
NOTE: Before torquing bearing carrier cover nut, gear case should either be mounted in
a stand specifically designed for holding gear cases or bolted to a driveshaft housing to
avoid possible damage to the gear case.
31. Using Cover Nut Tool (91-61069), torque cover nut to 210 Ib. ft. (285 Nm).
a b
51911
a - Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069)
b - Retainer Nut
32. Bend one lock tab of tab washer into cover nut (only one will align).
33. Bend remaining tabs of tab washer toward front of gear housing.
34. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) and torque shift shaft bushing to 50 Ib. ft.
(68 Nm).
51882
a - Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107)
b - Shift Shaft Bushing
Water Pump
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Install oil seals into water pump base, as follows:
a. Place water pump base on a press.
b. Just before installing each seal apply Loctite 271 on outside diameter of oil seal.
c. With a suitable mandrel, press the smaller diameter oil seal into pump base with
lip of oil seal toward impeller side of base.
d. With a suitable mandrel, press the larger diameter oil seal into pump base with lip
of oil seal toward gear housing side of base.
e. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seals and water pump base.
2. Install O-ring into O-ring groove of water pump base. Lubricate O-ring and oil seals
with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12).
c
b
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Oil Seal (Smaller OD)
c - O-Ring Groove
3. Install divider block if removed. Use RTV Sealer to seal seams between divider block
and gear housing.
4. Install a new water pump base gasket and install water pump base.
b c 51866
51878
a - Divider Block
b - Water Pump Base
c - Gasket
d - Hole (MUST be positioned as shown)
5. Install the following in order: Pump base to face plate gasket, face plate to pump cover
gasket. Gaskets and face plate are indexed by dowel pin location and must be in-
stalled correctly.
b
b
cc
51868
a - Gasket (Water Pump Base to Face Plate)
b - Face Plate
c - Gasket (Face Plate to Water Pump Cover)
6. Place impeller drive key on flat of driveshaft. Hold key on driveshaft with a small
amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12).
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repair that requires removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary
to reuse the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation or premature
impeller failure will occur. Original rotation is clockwise.
CAUTION
A visual inspection of impeller drive key MUST BE made to determine that drive
key is on flat of driveshaft after impeller is installed. If key has moved off flat of
driveshaft, repeat Steps 7 and 8.
7. Slide impeller down driveshaft to impeller drive key. Align drive key with keyway in the
center hub of impeller, and slide impeller over drive key.
8. If removed, install new water pump insert into pump cover as follows:
a. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to water pump insert area of pump cover.
b. Install water pump insert into pump cover, being sure that tab on insert enters re-
cess in pump cover.
c. Wipe any excess Quicksilver Perfect Seal from insert and cover.
NOTE: If 2 holes were drilled in top of water pump cover to aid in removal of insert, fill holes
with RTV Sealer or equivalent. Allow to cure 24 hours prior to operating engine.
9. Install water tube seal into pump cover. Plastic side of seal goes into cover first.
10. Reinstall water tube guide into water pump cover.
11. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant to inside of water
pump insert.
12. Position assembled water pump cover over driveshaft and lower over water pump
studs. Rotate driveshaft in a clockwise direction (viewed from top), while pushing
down on pump cover to ease impeller entry into cover.
13. Install water pump cover retainer washers, nuts and bolt.
CAUTION
DO NOT over-torque nuts and bolt, as this could cause cover to crack during op-
eration.
14. Torque water pump nuts to 50 Ib. in. (6.0 Nm), and water pump bolt to 35 Ib. in. (4 Nm).
15. Install centrifugal slinger over driveshaft and down against pump cover.
c 51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolts and Washers
CAUTION
DO NOT allow lubricant on top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in
clearance space, will not allow driveshaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subse-
quently, tightening the gear housing nuts (while excess lubricant is on top of dri-
veshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the power-
head and gear housing. Top of driveshaft is to be wiped free of lubricant.
3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant onto shift shaft
splines. (DO NOT allow lubricant on top of shift shaft.)
4. Apply a thin bead of G.E. Silicone Sealer (92-90113--2) against the top of divider
block.
5. Insert trim tab bolt into hole in rear of gear housing to driveshaft housing machined
surface.
6. Shift gear housing into forward gear and place guide block anchor pin into forward
gear position.
a
51900
a - Guide Block Anchor Pin
7. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing.
NOTE: If, while performing Step 8, the driveshaft splines will not align with crankshaft
splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear
housing is being pushed toward driveshaft housing.
8. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing while aligning shift shaft splines and
water tube with water tube guide (in water pump cover).
9. Place flat washers onto studs (located on either side of driveshaft housing). Start a
nut on these studs and tighten finger-tight.
10. Start bolt at rear of gear housing inside trim tab recess. DO NOT tighten bolt at this
time.
11. Recheck shift shaft spline engagement and correct if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not force gear case up into place with attaching nuts.
12. Evenly tighten 2 nuts which were started in Step 9. Torque to listing in “Torque Speci-
fications,” preceding.
13. After 2 nuts (located on either side of driveshaft housing) are tightened, check shift
operation as follows:
a. Place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position while turning prop shaft.
Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate clock-
wise.
b. Place guide block anchor pin into NEUTRAL position. Propeller shaft should ro-
tate freely clockwise/counterclockwise.
c. Place guide block anchor pin into REVERSE gear position. Rotate flywheel clock-
wise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate counterclockwise.
IMPORTANT: If shifting operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing
must be removed and the cause corrected.
14. Install washers and nuts onto studs (located on bottom center of anti-cavitation plate).
Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
15. Install special flat washer and nut on stud at leading edge of driveshaft housing.
Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
16. Torque bolt (started in Step 10) to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
17. Install trim tab, adjust to position in which it had previously been installed, and tighten
securely.
18. Install plastic cap into trim tab bolt opening at rear edge of driveshaft housing.
Propeller Installation
WARNING
When installing or removing propeller, because of the engine’s ease in starting,
VERIFY that the remote control is in NEUTRAL position and that the key switch
is “OFF.” Place a block of wood between the anti-cavitation plate and propeller
to prevent accidental starting and to protect hands from propeller blades while
removing or installing nut.
1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat the propeller shaft splines with
one of the following Quicksilver products:
-- Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6)
-- Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1)
-- 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12)
-- Perfect Seal (92-34227--1)
2. Place forward thrust hub over propeller shaft with shoulder side toward propeller.
3. Place propeller on propeller shaft and slide it up against thrust hub.
4. Place continuity washer (if equipped) onto shoulder of rear thrust hub.
5. Place rear thrust hub, tab washer and propeller nut on propeller shaft.
6. Thread propeller nut onto propeller shaft until nut is recessed into tab washer.
7. After propeller nut is recessed into tab washer, tighten nut securely [minimum of 55
Ib. ft. (74.5 Nm) torque].
8. Bend 3 of the tabs of tab washer down in grooves of rear thrust hub to secure propeller
nut. (If tab washer tabs do not align with slots, continue to tighten propeller nut to ob-
tain alignment. DO NOT loosen nut to align tabs.)
CAUTION
DO NOT misinterpret propeller shaft movement with propeller movement. If pro-
peller and propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft, this is normal; however,
propeller should not move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft.
9. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer (Steps 7 and
8, preceding). Propeller should be checked periodically for tightness, particularly if a
stainless steel propeller is used.
b 51916
a - Continuity Washer (If Equipped)
b - Rear Thrust Hub
c - Tab Washer
d - Propeller Nut
c
b
28160
WARNING
Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden,
sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown
overboard exposing them to serious injury or death.
1. Assemble steering link rod to steering cable with two flat washers (d) and nylon insert
locknut (“b” - Part Number 11-34863). Tighten locknut (b) until it seats, then back nut
off 1/4 turn.
2. Production Outboards - Assemble steering link rod to engine with special washer
head bolt (“a” - Part Number 10-14000) and nylon insert locknut (“c” - Part Number
11-34863). First torque bolt (a) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut (c) to 20 lb.
ft. (27 Nm).
High Performance Outboards - An access hole is provided through the bottom cowl
to ease installation of the link rod connecting bolt. Remove the BACK plug for installa-
tion and reinstall after installation.
c
WARNING
After installation is complete (and before operating outboard), check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) and at
all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals spe-
cified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifica-
tions.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional
lubrication at initial installation.
WARNING
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable hous-
ing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock
of cable could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate tran-
som end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C w/Teflon
(92-825407A12). Lubricate exposed portion of cable end (b) with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
4. Lubricate pivot point (c) of steering link rod and ball joint (d) of link rod with SAE 30
Weight Oil.
5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should
be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering
mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased.
Lubricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
dd
aa
cc
a bb
28169
CAUTION
With this kit installed, the upper (outboard) mounting bolts MUST BE installed so
that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom, as illustrated. Failure
to install upper mounting bolts, as shown in illustration, could result in interfer-
ence between steering cable nut and ends of mounting bolts when outboard is
tilted up.
CAUTION
Marine sealer must be used on shanks bolts to make a water-tight installation.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use an impact driver when tightening transom bolts.
Apply marine sealer to shanks of mounting bolts (not threads) and secure outboard to
transom with 4 bolts, flat washers and locknuts, as shown. Be sure that installation is
water-tight.
Install upper bolts so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom.
a
b c
b
a - Gear Rack
b - Steering Cables
c - Rotary Steering Heads
a
c
dd
c 28163
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to outboard swivel
bracket to prevent bolts from turning out.
Install steering cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2
locking tab washers. Verify longer threaded end of tube is toward starboard side of boat.
Temporarily adjust tube so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same dis-
tance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time.
d
b
a
c 51891
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward
Starboard Side of Boat)
b - Mounting Bracket
c - Locking Tab Washers (2)
d - Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer)
aa
51890
Insert steering cable ends (a) thru outboard tilt tube (b) and cable mounting tube (c).
Thread steering cable attaching nuts (d) on to tubes hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nuts only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
d b a
c
51891
Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in. (16 mm) from end of mounting
tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable.
5/8″(16 mm)
a c d e
51890
Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a).
a e 51890
Coupler Installation
WARNING
Locknuts must be used with bolts to secure steering cables to coupler. Failure
to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure.
Slide coupler (a) onto steering cable ends and secure each steering cable to coupler with
bolt (b) and locknut (c) as shown. Tighten to a torque of 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
b c
a b
51888
Installing Link Rod
WARNING
Steering link rod MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering
coupler, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) and two nylon insert locknuts
(11-34863), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert locknuts
MUST BE tightened as specified.
Lubricate hole in steering coupler, with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. Assemble steering link
rod to steering coupler, using 2 flat washers (one each side of coupler) and nylon insert
locknut. Tighten locknut until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 Ib. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque],
then back nut off 1/4 turn.
Lubricate ball joint in steering link rod with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rod to outboard
steering arm, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) provided and nylon insert lock-
nut as shown. Torque special bolt to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut to 20 Ib. ft. (27
Nm).
e
b
f
a d 28172
a - Steering Coupler
b - Steering Link Rod
c - Flat Washer (2)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 lb. in.
(13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn
e - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
f - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
c a d
51887
After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket, to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against
flat on each adjustment nut.
c 51887
c a
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut)
Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft.
(47.5 Nm).
a 51889
NOTE: Cable attaching nuts with a “V” groove around the outer circumference of the nut
are self locking and do not require locking sleeves.
WARNING
After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals spe-
cified, following:
WARNING
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable hous-
ing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock
could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate tran-
som end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A2).
Lubricate exposed portion of cable ends (b) with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
4. Lubricate pivot point (c) of steering link rod and ball joint (d) of link rod/steering coupler
with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should
be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering
mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lu-
bricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
d
b
c
a a 28170
CAUTION
With this kit installed, the upper (outboard) mounting bolts MUST BE installed so
that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom, as illustrated. Failure
to install upper mounting bolts, as shown in illustration, could result in interfer-
ence between steering cable nut and ends of mounting bolts when outboard is
tilted up.
Install upper bolts so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom.
Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation
(Both Steering Cables Routed Together Down Starboard Side of Boat)
SUPER RIDE-GUIDE STEERING KIT INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: Steering cable must be installed into tilt tube of port outboard before
outboard is mounted on boat transom.
Both gear racks or rotary steering heads must be installed so that both steering
cables will be routed together on the same side of the boat and will push-and-pull
together.
1. Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with
Super Ride-Guide Kit.
2. Make sure that both gear racks or rotary steering heads are installed so that both
steering cables are routed together and will push-and-pull together.
a
b b a
a - Straight Rack (Left); Rotary Steering (Right)
b - Steering Cables (Install so that Both Cables Will Push and Pull Together)
c c
b
28164
a
a - Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Locking Retainers (2)
c - Bolts (4) - 5/8 in. (16 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), then Bend
Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to outboard swivel
bracket, to prevent bolts from turning out.
Install steering cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2
locking tab washers. Be sure longer threaded end of tube is toward starboard side of boat.
Temporarily adjust tube, so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same dis-
tance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time.
d
b
a 51891
c
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward
Starboard Side of Boat)
b - Mounting Bracket
c - Locking Tab Washers (2)
d - Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer)
IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube with 2-4-C w/Teflon
before installing steering cable.
Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube (starboard outboard) with 2-4-C
w/Teflon.
Insert steering cable end (a) thru cable mounting tube (b) and thread steering cable at-
taching nut (c) onto tube hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
c b
51887
Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in. (16 mm) from end of mounting
tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable.
5/8” (16 mm)
a c d e 51890
Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a).
a e 51890
51890
Insert steering cable end (b) thru tilt tube (c) of port outboard and thread steering cable
attaching nut (d) onto tilt tube hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nuts only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
b
d c
51887
WARNING
Steering link rods MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering
cable end, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) and two nylon insert lock-
nuts (11-34863), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert lock-
nuts MUST BE tightened as specified.
e c
f a
d 50061
a
b
c c
e
e
a a
b b
d f d f
28166
Lubricate holes in ends of steering cables, with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubri-
cant. Assemble steering link rods to steering cable ends of each outboard, using flat
washers and nylon insert locknuts. Tighten locknuts until they seat [DO NOT exceed 120
Ib. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn.
Lubricate ball joints in steering link rods with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rods to out-
board steering arms, using special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon in-
sert locknuts as shown. Torque special bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm) then torque locknuts to
20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
c c
51889
a - Steering Arm (Port Outboard Shown)
b - Extension Bracket
c - Locking Retainer (2 Each Bracket)
d - Bolts (2 Each Bracket) 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Long - Torque to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm),
Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up Against Flats on Each Bolt
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures extension bracket to outboard steering arm to prevent bolts from turning
out.
STEERING COUPLER ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Position outboards so that they are facing straight forward. (Distance between threaded
hole centers of steering arm extensions MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft centerlines.)
Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C w/Teflon and slide sleeves on steering cou-
pler.
Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering eyes.
Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye.
Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance between hole centers of steer-
ing eye ball joints is equal to distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm ex-
tensions. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of equal length and threads MUST
NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm).
c d e b a b d c
50061
a - Coupler
b - Rubber Sleeve
c - Steering Eye
d - Rubber Bushing
e - Jam Nut
WARNING
Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum.
Thread length of steering eye is 3-1/2 in. (89 mm), so exposed thread must not
extend out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). Failure to adhere to this re-
quirement could result in steering system failure.
Lubricate ball joint in steering eyes, with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering arm extension brackets, using
special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknuts as shown.
IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening spe-
cial washer head bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance between
centers of special washer head bolts MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft center lines, for proper steering. It adjustment is necessary, temporarily re-
move special washer head bolt/locknut from one steering eye and turn eye in or out
to correct alignment.
Torque special washer head bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft.
(27 Nm).
WARNING
Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum, and
jam nut must be tightened against coupler to prevent coupler from turning.
Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m).
Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of steering eyes and position rub-
ber bushings and rubber sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes.
f a f
g g 28167
f
c
g h
b d
d c
h h
f
f c e a 50061
a - Coupler
b - Rubber Sleeve
c - Steering Eye
d - Rubber Bushing
e - Jam Nut - Torque (Against Coupler) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
f - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
g - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
h - Steering Arm Extension Bracket
c d
51887
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts
c - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System
d - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System
After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket, to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against
a flat on each nut.
b
51887
c c a
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut)
Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft.
(47.5 Nm).
a
51887
WARNING
After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab Adjustment”, following.
Opposite Side Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation
(One Cable Routed down Starboard Side of Boat and One Cable Routed down Port
Side of Boat)
SUPER RIDE-GUIDE STEERING KIT INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: Steering cable must be installed into tilt tube of port outboard before
outboard is mounted on boat transom.
Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with Super
Ride-Guide Kit.
STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - STARBOARD OUTBOARD
IMPORTANT: Mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube MUST BE secured
to outboard swivel bracket, using 5/8 in. (16 mm) long bolts supplied with this dual
cable - dual outboard attaching kit.
Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, onto swivel bracket of star-
board outboard.
d d
c
28164
b a
a - Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - “J” Clip - Supplied with Outboard
c - Locking Retainers (2)
d - Bolts (4) - 5/8 in. (16 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), Then Bend
Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt.
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, to prevent bolts
from turning out.
Install Steering Cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2
locking tab washers. Verify longer threaded end of tube is toward center of boat transom.
Temporarily adjust tube, so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same dis-
tance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time.
b d
51891
a
c
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward
Center of Boat Transom)
b - Mounting Bracket
c - Locking Tab Washers (2)
d - Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer)
b c
51887
Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in (16 mm) from end of mounting
tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable.
5/8″(16 mm)
e d c b
51890
Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a).
51888
a
51890
Insert steering cable end (b) (steering cable routed down starboard side of boat) thru tilt
tube (c) of port outboard and thread steering cable attaching nut (d) onto tilt tube hand
tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
d b
c
51887
WARNING
Steering link rods MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering
cable end, using special washer head bolt (10-14000) and two nylon insert lock-
nuts (11-34863), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert lock-
nuts MUST BE tightened as specified.
Lubricate holes in ends of steering cables, with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon
(92-825407A12). Assemble steering link rods to steering cable ends of each outboard,
using flat washers and nylon insert locknuts. Tighten locknuts until they seat [DO NOT
exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn.
Lubricate ball joints in steering link rods with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rods to out-
board steering arms, using special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon in-
sert locknuts as shown. Torque special bolts to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) then torque locknuts to
20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
e c
e
f a
d 50061
a
b
e c c
e
a
a
d d
f b
b f 28165
a - Flat Washer (2 Each Link Rod)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque Until it Seats [DO NOT Exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5
Nm) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn
c - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-14000) - Torque to 20 lb.ft. (27 Nm)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
e - Steering Link Rod
f - Steering Cable End
c c
51889
a - Steering Arm (Port Outboard Shown)
b - Extension Bracket
c - Locking Retainer (2 Each Bracket)
d - Bolts (2 Each Bracket) 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Long - Torque to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm),
Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up Against Flats on Each Bolt
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures extension bracket to outboard steering arm, to prevent bolts from turn-
ing out.
STEERING COUPLER ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Position outboards so that they are facing straight forward. (Distance between threaded
hole centers of steering arm extensions MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft centerlines.)
Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C w/Teflon and slide sleeves on steering cou-
pler.
Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering eyes.
Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye.
Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance between hole centers of steer-
ing eye ball joints is equal to distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm ex-
tensions. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of equal length and threads MUST
NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm).
c d e b a b d c
50061
a - Coupler
b - Rubber Sleeve
c - Steering Eye
d - Rubber Bushing
e - Jam Nut
WARNING
Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum.
Thread length of steering eye is 3-1/2 in. (89 mm), so exposed thread must not
extend out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). Failure to adhere to this re-
quirement could result in steering system failure.
Lubricate ball joint in steering eyes with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering arm extension brackets, using
special washer head bolts (10-14000) provided and nylon insert locknuts, as shown.
IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening spe-
cial washer head bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance between
centers of special washer head bolts MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft center lines, for proper steering. If adjustment is necessary, temporarily re-
move special washer head bolt/locknut from one steering eye and turn eye in or out
to correct alignment.
Torque special washer head bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft.
(27 Nm).
WARNING
Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum, and
jam nut must be tightened against coupler to prevent coupler from turning.
Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of steering eyes and position rub-
ber bushings and rubber sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes.
f f
a
g g 28174
f
c
g h 50061
d b d
c
h h
f
f
c e a 50061
a
b
d c 51887
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts
c - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System
d - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System
After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against
a flat on each nut.
b
c c a 51887
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut)
Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5
Nm).
NOTE: Cable attaching nuts with a “V” groove around outer circumference are self locking
and do not require locking sleeves.
WARNING
After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab Adjustment,” following.
WARNING
When 2 couplers are connected together with coupler link rod, a lock washer
must be used on each side of coupler link rod, and link rod must be torqued to
20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m) into end of each coupler.
a b a
51890
c
a - Couplers Connected Together
b - Lock washers
c - Coupler Link Rod [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) into End of Each Coupler]
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals spe-
cified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifica-
tions.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional
lubrication at initial installation.
WARNING
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable hous-
ing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock
of cable could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate tran-
som end of steering cables thru grease fittings with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12).
Lubricate exposed portion of cable ends with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
4. Lubricate pivot points of steering link rods and ball joints of link rods/steering coupler
with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should
be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering
mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lu-
bricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
d d
a c c
a b
a b a
28168
d d
c
c
b a a a a b
28175
f
k c g
d
l
j e
Figure 1
a - Ride-Guide Cable
b - Ride-Guide Yoke
c - Pivot Block
d - Pivot Spacer
e - 15 in. (381 mm) (Centerline of Attaching Kit Pivot to Centerline of Outboard)
f - Pivot Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)]
g - Outboard Steering Arm
h - “Clevis Kit”
i - Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)]
j - Bolt [3/8 in. x 2-1/2 in. (9.5 mm x 63.5 mm)]
k - Flat Washer
l - Transom Bracket
3. Place Ride-Guide yoke on pivot block and secure with 7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in. (11.1 mm
x 44.5 mm) bolt and locknut, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Torque locknut to 10 Ib. ft.
(13.5 Nm), then back off 1/4-turn.
g f
b
c
e
Figure 2
a - Transom Backing Plate
b - Bolt [5/16 in. x 3-1/4 in. (7.9 mm x 82.5 mm)]
c - Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)]
d - Ride-Guide Yoke Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)] Then
Back Off 1/4-Turn
e - 2-3/8 in. (60.3 mm) Maximum Transom Thickness
f - Bolt [7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in. (11.1 mm x 44.5 mm)]
g - Ride-Guide Yoke
4. Install one cable tube jam nut onto steering cable tube. Place tab washer over
Ride-Guide yoke, then insert cable tube thru tab washer and yoke. Install second
cable tube jam nut onto cable tube but do not tighten at this time. (Figure 3)
5. Position transom attaching kit on transom as shown:
a. Determine centerline of outboard, then measure 15 in. (38.1 cm) over from this
centerline and draw a vertical line on transom. (Figure 1)
g
b
d
Figure 3
a - Ride-Guide Yoke
b - 0 in. to 1/2 in. (0 mm to 12.8 mm) (Center of Ride-Guide Yoke to Top of Tran-
som)
c - Top of Transom
d - Transom Bracket
e - Cable Tube Jam Nuts [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)]
f - Tab Washer
g - After Jam Nuts Are Torqued to Specification, Bend Locking Tabs against Nuts
h - Cable Guide Tube
i - Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Nut [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)]
j - “Clevis Kit”
k - Clevis Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)]
NOTE: When drilling thru transom, be sure that holes are drilled perpendicular to tran-
som.
6. With attaching kit positioned as outlined preceding, use 3 holes in transom bracket
as a guide and drill three 11/32 in. (8.7 mm) holes thru transom.
7. Use a marine-type sealer on three 5/16 in. x 3-1/4in. (7.9mm x 82.6mm) bolts. Secure
attaching kit to transom, using transom backing plate, 3 bolts (with sealer) and 3 lock-
nuts, installed as shown in Figure 2. Torque lock nuts to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm).
STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate steering cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12).
2. Install steering cable thru steering cable tube and secure to cable tube with cable at-
taching nut. (Figure 3) Do not tighten cable attaching nut at this time.
3. Attach Ride-Guide cable to outboard steering arm, using the proper “Clevis Kit.” In-
stallation instructions for clevis are with “Clevis Kit.”
4. Adjust 2 large jam nuts on cable tube of attaching kit, so that steering wheel is in nor-
mal straight-driving position with outboard in straight-running position. Torque each
jam nut to 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm), then bend a side of tab washer against flat of each jam
nut. (Figure 3)
5. Torque Ride-Guide cable attaching nut (which secures cable to guide tube) to 35 Ib.
ft. (47.5 Nm). (Figure 3)
WARNING
After installation is completed (and before operating outboard), check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Maintenance Instructions
Lubrication and maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed
at intervals specified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
CAUTION
Core of steering cable must be fully retracted into cable housing when lubricating
cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of cable could occur.
1. Lubricate outboard end of Ride-Guide steering cable (thru grease fitting - if equipped
- next to cable attaching nut) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon.
NOTE: Ride-Guide steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional
lubrication at initial installation.
2. Lubricate all steering system pivot points (and exposed portion of steering cable core)
with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. Lubricate at intervals specified preceding.
3. Carefully check steering system components for wear (at intervals specified, preced-
ing). Replace worn parts.
4. Check steering system fasteners (at intervals specified, preceding) to be sure that
they are torqued to correct specifications. (Figures 1, 2 and 3)
COLOR DIAGRAMS
Table of Contents
2.5 Litre OptiMax 2000 Model Year Analog Typical SmartCraft Control Area Network (CAN)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-3 Installation 2001 Model Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-11
2.5 Litre OptiMax 2000 Model Year Digital 2.5 Litre OptiMax 2000 & 2001 Model Year
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-5 Fuel & Air Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-13
2.5 Litre OptiMax 2001 Model Year 2.5 Litre OptiMax 2000 & 2001 Model Year
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-7 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-15
Typical SmartCraft (Non CAN) Installation
2000 Model Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-9
8 10 24 24
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
31 32
1 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 4
3 5
23
8 10 24 24
2
8
6
33
1 7
1
2 34
1 12 23 3
4
35
5
6 36
7
8
9
37
10
11
12
13 38
14
15
16
17
18
39
19
20
21
40
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
41
11 22 32 31
32
8 10 24 24
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 30 31
14
1 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 4
3 5
8 10 24
23
24
2 6 32
8
1 7
1
2 33
1 12 23 3
4
34
5
6
7
35
8
9
36
10
11
12
13 37
14
15
16
38
17
18
39 40
19
20
21
41 42
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
11 22 32 31
32
43
5 6
5 6
31
1
1 9 17 2
3
4
5
6
32
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
8 16 24 24
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 12
13
34 33
14
15
16 35
17
18
19
20
21
22 4
8 16 24 23
24 36 2
3 5
6
8
1 7
1
2
1 12 23 3
4
5
6
7
8
37
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
40
16 38 39
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 41
29
30
11 22 32 31
32
42
TYPICAL
SMARTCRAFT (NON CAN)
INSTALLATION
2000 MODEL YEAR
34 29 24
27
35
23 22
36
30 21
28 25
33
3 18
19
37
26 20
32
17
8
7
6
5 C B
13
D E A
16
15
4 11
1 12
14
9
10
TYPICAL
SMARTCRAFT (CAN)
INSTALLATION
2001 MODEL YEAR
13
17
14 14 14
16 16
12
15 15
14
18
10
11
2
3 21
20
9 19
10 22
7
6
5 25 C B
23
D E A
4 27
1
26 24
29 28
14 15
10
16
20 17
26
11 18 18 13
13
7 24
25
4 23
18 13
13 18
27
9 21
8 19
6 18 13
13 18
5 22
3
17
12 12
1
29
2 28 58621
16
6
17
3
4
2
b 1
19
9 15
a 18
8
14
13
11 12
10
6
58627
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1A - Specifications A
Table of Contents
Master Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1 Propeller Information Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-7
Master Specifications
**On some light boat applications after the break-in is completed and the engine is being run at cruising
speed – between 4000 and 5000 RPM – the fuel to oil ratio may be as high as 28:1. This results from a re-
duced throttle opening with a corresponding reduction in fuel consumption.
*Amperage listed is when battery is in a discharged state. If battery is fully charged, amperage readings will
be less.
Dimension
“A” at
Right
Angle
(90°) to
Piston Pin
0.500 in.
Optimax 135
• Wide Open Throttle RPM: 5000-5500 • Gear Reduction: 2.00:1
No. of Gross Boat Boat Speed Propeller
Diameter Pitch Blades Model Wgt. (lbs) Length (mph) Part Number
13.75″ 26 4 Trophy+ Up to 1900 Up to 18′ 56-63 48-825944A47
13.75″ 25 3 Laser II 1800 – 2000 16 – 18′ 54-60 48-16550A46
13.75″ 25 4 Trophy+ 1800 – 2000 16 – 18′ 54-60 48-825942A47
13.25″ 25 5 Hi-Five 1800 – 2000 16 – 18′ 54-60 48-816374A46
13.38″ 25 3 Vengeance 1800 – 2000 16 – 18′ 54-60 48-16322A45
13.38″ 25 3 Aluminum 1800 – 2000 16 – 18′ 54-60 48-78126A45
13.75″ 24 4 Trophy+ 1900 – 2100 16 – 18′ 51-58 48-825940A47
13.75″ 23 3 Laser II 2000 – 2300 17 – 19′ 49-55 48-16548A46
13.75″ 23 4 Trophy+ 2000 – 2300 17 – 19′ 49-55 48-825938A47
13.25″ 23 5 Hi-Five 2000 – 2300 17 – 19′ 49-55 48-815762A46
13.5″ 23 3 Vengeance 2000 – 2300 17 – 19′ 49-55 48-16320A45
14″ 23 3 Aluminum 2000 – 2300 17 – 19′ 49-55 48-832834A45
13.88″ 21 3 Laser II 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 43-50 48-16546A46
13.75″ 21 4 Trophy+ 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 43-50 48-825936A47
13.25″ 21 5 Hi-Five 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 43-50 48-815760A46
13.75″ 21 3 Vengeance 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 43-50 48-16318A45
14.25″ 21 3 Aluminum 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 43-50 48-832832A45
14″ 19 3 Laser II 2500 – 3000 18 – 21′ 38-45 48-16544A46
13.75″ 19 4 Trophy+ 2500 – 3000 18 – 21′ 38-45 48-825932A46
13.25″ 19 5 Hi-Five 2500 – 3000 18 – 21′ 38-45 48-815758A46
14″ 19 3 Vengeance 2500 – 3000 18 – 21′ 38-45 48-16316A45
14.5″ 19 3 Aluminum 2500 – 3000 18 – 21′ 38-45 48-832830A45
13.75″ 17 4 Trophy+ 2800 – 3600 19 – 22′ 32-40 48-825930A46
13.5″ 17 5 Hi-Five 2800 – 3600 19 – 22′ 32-40 48-821154A46
14.5″ 17 3 Vengeance 2800 – 3600 19 – 22′ 32-40 48-16314A45
15″ 17 3 Aluminum 2800 – 3600 19 – 22′ 32-40 48-832828A45
14.5″ 15 3 Vengeance 3400 – 4800 20 – 24′ 25-34 48-16312A45
15.5″ 15 3 Aluminum 3400 – 4800 20 – 24′ 25-34 48-78116A45
16″ 13 3 Aluminum 4500+ Pontoon 19-28 48-78114A45
16″ 12 3 Aluminum 5500+ Pontoon/Work 16-25 48-16436A45
16″ 11 3 Aluminum 6500+ House/Work 1-20 48-78112A45
Optimax 150
• Wide Open Throttle RPM: 5250-5750 • Gear Reduction: 1.87:1
No. of Gross Boat Boat Speed Propeller
Diameter Pitch Blades Model Wgt. (lbs) Length (mph) Part Number
14.62″ 27 3 Tempest+ Up to 1800 Up to 18′ 66-74 48-825868A47
13.75″ 26 4 Trophy+ Up to 1900 Up to 19′ 64-71 48-825944A47
14.62″ 26 3 Tempest+ Up to 1900 Up to 19′ 64-71 48-825874A47
13.75″ 25 3 Laser II 1700 – 2000 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-16550A46
13.75″ 25 4 Trophy+ 1700 – 2000 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-825942A47
14.62″ 25 3 Tempest+ 1700 – 2000 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-825866A47
13.25″ 25 5 Hi-Five 1700 – 2000 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-816374A46
13.38″ 25 3 Aluminum 1700 – 2000 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-78126A45
13.75″ 24 4 Trophy+ 1800 – 2100 18 – 20′ 58-65 48-825940A47
14.62″ 24 3 Tempest+ 1800 – 2100 18 – 20′ 58-65 48-825872A47
13.75″ 23 3 Laser II 1900 – 2200 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-16548A46
13.75″ 23 4 Trophy+ 1900 – 2200 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-825938A47
14.62″ 23 3 Tempest+ 1900 – 2200 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-825864A47
13.25″ 23 5 Hi-Five 1900 – 2200 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-815762A46
13.5″ 23 3 Vengeance 1900 – 2200 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-16320A46
14″ 23 3 Aluminum 1900 – 2200 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-832834A45
13.88″ 21 3 Laser II 2000 – 2500 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-16546A46
13.75″ 21 4 Trophy+ 2000 – 2500 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-825934A47
14.62″ 21 3 Tempest+ 2000 – 2500 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-825862A47
13.25″ 21 5 Hi-Five 2000 – 2500 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-815760A46
13.75″ 21 3 Vengeance 2000 – 2500 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-16318A46
14.25″ 21 3 Aluminum 2000 – 2500 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-832832A45
14″ 19 3 Laser II 2300 – 2900 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-16544A46
13.75″ 19 4 Trophy+ 2300 – 2900 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-825932A46
14.62″ 19 3 Tempest+ 2300 – 2900 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-825860A47
13.25″ 19 5 Hi-Five 2300 – 2900 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-815758A46
14″ 19 3 Vengeance 2300 – 2900 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-16316A46
14.5″ 19 3 Aluminum 2300 – 2900 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-832830A45
13.5″ 17 5 Hi-Five 2700 – 3500 19 – 23′ 38-46 48-821154A46
14.5″ 17 3 Vengeance 2700 – 3500 19 – 23′ 38-46 48-16314A46
15″ 17 3 Aluminum 2700 – 3500 19 – 23′ 38-46 48-832828A45
14.5″ 15 3 Vengeance 3200 – 4500 21 – 25′ 31-40 48-16312A46
15.25″ 15 3 Aluminum 3200 – 4500 21 – 25′ 31-40 48-78116A45
16″ 13 3 Aluminum 4000+ Pontoon 23-33 48-78114A45
16″ 12 3 Aluminum 5500+ Pontoon/Work 16-27 48-16436A45
16″ 11 3 Aluminum 7500+ House/Work 1-23 48-78112A45
Optimax 175
• Wide Open Throttle RPM: 5250-5750 • Gear Reduction: 1.87:1
No. of Gross Boat Boat Speed Propeller
Diameter Pitch Blades Model Wgt. (lbs) Length (mph) Part Number
14.62″ 27 3 Tempest+ Up to 2100 Up to 18′ 66-74 48-825868A47
13.75″ 26 4 Trophy+ Up to 2300 Up to 19′ 64-71 48-825944A47
14.62″ 26 3 Tempest+ Up to 2300 Up to 19′ 64-71 48-825874A47
13.75″ 25 3 Laser II 2000 – 2400 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-16550A46
13.75″ 25 4 Trophy+ 2000 – 2400 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-825942A47
14.62″ 25 3 Tempest+ 2000 – 2400 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-825866A47
13.25″ 25 5 Hi-Five 2000 – 2400 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-816374A46
13.38″ 25 3 Aluminum 2000 – 2400 17 – 19′ 61-68 48-78126A45
13.75″ 24 4 Trophy+ 2100 – 2500 18 – 20′ 58-65 48-825940A47
14.62″ 24 3 Tempest+ 2100 – 2500 18 – 20′ 58-65 48-825872A47
13.75″ 23 3 Laser II 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-16548A46
13.75″ 23 4 Trophy+ 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-825938A47
14.62″ 23 3 Tempest+ 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-825864A47
13.25″ 23 5 Hi-Five 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-815762A46
13.5″ 23 3 Vengeance 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-16320A46
14″ 23 3 Aluminum 2200 – 2600 18 – 20′ 55-62 48-832834A45
13.88″ 21 3 Laser II 2400 – 2900 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-16546A46
13.75″ 21 4 Trophy+ 2400 – 2900 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-825934A47
14.62″ 21 3 Tempest+ 2400 – 2900 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-825862A47
13.25″ 21 5 Hi-Five 2400 – 2900 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-815760A46
13.75″ 21 3 Vengeance 2400 – 2900 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-16318A46
14.25″ 21 3 Aluminum 2400 – 2900 18 – 21′ 50-57 48-832832A45
14″ 19 3 Laser II 2700 – 3300 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-16544A46
13.75″ 19 4 Trophy+ 2700 – 3300 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-825932A46
14.62″ 19 3 Tempest+ 2700 – 3300 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-825860A47
13.25″ 19 5 Hi-Five 2700 – 3300 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-815758A46
14″ 19 3 Vengeance 2700 – 3300 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-16316A46
14.5″ 19 3 Aluminum 2700 – 3300 19 – 22′ 44-52 48-832830A45
13.5″ 17 5 Hi-Five 3100 – 3900 19 – 23′ 38-46 48-821154A46
14.5″ 17 3 Vengeance 3100 – 3900 19 – 23′ 38-46 48-16314A46
15″ 17 3 Aluminum 3100 – 3900 19 – 23′ 38-46 48-832828A45
14.5″ 15 3 Vengeance 3700 – 4900 21 – 25′ 31-40 48-16312A46
15.25″ 15 3 Aluminum 3700 – 4900 21 – 25′ 31-40 48-78116A45
16″ 13 3 Aluminum 4500+ Pontoon 23-33 48-78114A45
16″ 12 3 Aluminum 6000+ Pontoon/Work 16-27 48-16436A45
16″ 11 3 Aluminum 8000+ House/Work 1-23 48-78112A45